Avaya Installing and Configuring G450 Media Gateway

Installing and Upgrading the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway
03-602054
Issue 4
May 2009
© 2009 Avaya Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Notice
While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this
document was complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya Inc. can
assume no liability for any errors. Changes and corrections to the information
in this document may be incorporated in future releases.
For full legal page information, please see the complete document,
Avaya Legal Page for Software Documentation,
Document number 03-600758.
To locate this document on the website, simply go to
http://www.avaya.com/support and search for the document number in
the search box.
Documentation disclaimer
Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to
the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications,
additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. Customer and/or End User
agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and
employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of,
or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this
documentation to the extent made by the Customer or End User.
Link disclaimer
Avaya Inc. is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web
sites referenced elsewhere within this documentation, and Avaya does not
necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered
within them. We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and
we have no control over the availability of the linked pages.
Warranty
Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales
agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s
standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this
product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site:
http://www.avaya.com/support
Copyright
Except where expressly stated otherwise, the Product is protected by copyright
and other laws respecting proprietary rights. Unauthorized reproduction,
transfer, and or use can be a criminal, as well as a civil, offense under the
applicable law.
Avaya support
Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask
questions about your product. The support telephone number
is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone
numbers, see the Avaya Web site:
http://www.avaya.com/support
Contents
About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Downloading this book and updates from the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Downloading this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safety labels and security alert labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Related resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Within the US. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sending us comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 1: Before you install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Before going to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Preparing required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Equipment required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Equipment required for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Equipment required if you are not installing an S8300 Server . . . . . . . 22
Obtaining the G450 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Obtaining RFA access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Checking license file and Avaya Aura Communication
Manager versions for a Local Survivable Processor (LSP) . . . . . . . . . . 23
Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop . . . . . . . 23
Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART)
for the RAS IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Obtaining the RAS IP address and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Downloading recent firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW). . . . . . . . . . . 25
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Environmental verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Grounding verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removing power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Unpacking and checking package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . 29

Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Mounting the G450 in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Brackets without cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Issue 4 May 2009 3

Contents
Brackets with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Attaching each mounting bracket to the G450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Before mounting the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Mounting the G450 in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Mounting the G450 on a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Attaching brackets to the G450 for wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fastening the G450 to the wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Placing the G450 on a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Step 3: Installing the media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Before inserting media modules into the G450 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Combination limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Allocating slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Inserting the S8300 Server module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Inserting media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Step 4: Attaching ground conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
General grounding requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Ground conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Ground block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Restricted Access Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Approved grounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connecting the safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Attaching the ground wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Step 5: Connecting power to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
PWR LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 3: Connecting devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting a switch or a network data port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting a computer to the Services port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting an IP telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting the telephone to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Connecting an ISDN BRI station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Connecting one ISDN BRI station to one ISDN port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Connecting an analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting a DCP telephone to an
MM712 or MM717 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Contents
Connecting an analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Connecting an E1/T1 trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules . . . . . . . . 55
Connecting the MM716 or MM717 front panel connector
to a punch down block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Step 2: Installing circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting a WAN to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting a WAN link to the MM342 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting an E1/T1 WAN link to the MM340 media module. . . . . . . . 58
Connecting an Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting an external router to the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Step 4: Installing the Coupled Bonding Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installing the CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Installing the contact closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones 60
Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access . . . 63

Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connecting and enabling a serial modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 without S8300) . . . . . . . . 66
Testing the modem connection (G450 without S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Accessing the Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Changing the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance
Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting and enabling the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Testing the modem connection (G450 with S8300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
If a USB CD-ROM drive is required to download software upgrades . . . . . 74
Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Configuring basic gateway connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 6: After installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Step 1: Testing the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Testing data connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Issue 4 May 2009 5

Contents
Testing telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Testing trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
LSP failover testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Step 2: Removing the installation equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Chapter 7: Adding media modules and devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Adding a media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adding voice modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adding WAN modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adding a LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Configuring the LAN device on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Recording LAN information for software configuration. . . . . . . . . . . 82
Testing the LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adding a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Connecting the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring the telephone on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Recording telephone information for software configuration . . . . . . . 83
Testing the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Adding a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Ordering the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Special considerations when ordering an analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . 84
Connecting the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configuring the trunk on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Recording trunk information for software configuration . . . . . . . . . . 85
Testing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Adding a WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Ordering the WAN line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Connecting the WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Configuring the WAN line on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Recording WAN information for software configuration . . . . . . . . . . 86
Testing the WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Adding an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units . . . . . . 87

Adding or removing G450 main board modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Removing and inserting the G450 main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Adding or removing VoIP modules: MP20 and MP80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Replacing the fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Replacing a power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Contents
Installing the upgrade memory kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Inserting or replacing a RAM card in the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Inserting a G450 1.x RAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Replacing the G450 2.x RAM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Inserting or removing a compact flash memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Inserting a compact flash memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Removing a compact flash memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Aura

Communication Manager software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Upgrading the software using a CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Upgrading the software without a CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Remote configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Performing the upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Upgrading G450 firmware using Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . . . . . 105
Upgrading G450 firmware from the primary controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Upgrading G450 firmware using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW). . . . . . . . 106
Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Aura Communication
Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . 108
Example upgrade via FTP/TFTP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Preparing installation worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Entering values in Server Values worksheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setting up a TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server. . . . . . . . . 112
Copying firmware files to the /tftpboot directory of an S8300 Server . . . 113
Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device . . . . . . . . 114
Example upgrade using the CLI via a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files . . . 115

Administering the upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Upgrading the IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Issue 4 May 2009 7

Contents
TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Upgrading the 4602SW and 4602D phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Upgrading 4620 IP phones after the script files are already stored in NVRAM 121
Failure scenarios and repair actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Upgrading considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Chapter 12: Backing up and restoring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

One telephone stops working. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Identifying the problem when one phone stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Several telephones stop working. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Identifying the problem when several phones stop working . . . . . . . . . . 128
No power on the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
A trunk stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
A WAN line stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
CLI is not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Appendix A: Front panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules 133
Media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
System LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
USB ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Console port (Console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Services port (Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Compact Flash Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Emergency Transfer Relay port (ETR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Contact Closure port (CCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Implement the Contact Closure feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Router ports (ETH WAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Switch ports (ETH LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Reset (RST) and Alternate Software Bank (ASB) buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Load firmware from a bank other than the default bank during startup . . 137
The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
S8300 Server ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
S8300 Server port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
The front panel of the Avaya MM340 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
MM340 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
MM340 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Contents

MM342 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
MM342 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
MM710 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
MM710 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
MM711 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
MM711 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
MM712 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
MM712 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MM714 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MM714 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
The front panel of the Avaya MM714B media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
MM714B ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
MM714B LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
MM716 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
MM716 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
MM717 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
MM717 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
MM720 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
MM720 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
MM722 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
MM722 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Appendix B: Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

G450 Media Gateway specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
USB modems supported by the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
USB modems supported by the S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) . . . . . 155

Accessing Avaya IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Issue 4 May 2009 9

Contents
Preliminary screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

MGC configuration and upgrade options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Configuring and upgrading the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Upgrading an existing MGC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Configuring the primary controller IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Gateway configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Firmware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Modem configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Telephony configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Trunk configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Adding a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Modifying trunk parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Modifying IP route configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Displaying trunk status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Removing a trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Configuring a trunk media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Endpoint installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Alarm configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Password and final screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . . 189

Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Performing a basic configuration of the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Connect a modem, if necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Connecting a serial modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Connecting a USB modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Test the modem connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Testing the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Typical adjunct power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Auxiliary power for an attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Local and Phantom Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Shared resources of IA 770 coresidency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Where is the IA770 location and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Using an AUDIX trunk group as well as an AUDIX hunt group for
new systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Contents
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX installations and S8300

upgrades for IA770 INTUITY AUDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Call center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
About Avaya G450 announcement software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
UPS models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Terminal server installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Equipment required for installing and administering the terminal server . . . 216
What are the distance limits for the terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
How is the terminal server cabling connected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Connecting the IOLAN+ to the adjunct and the LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Administering the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Connecting the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Administering the IOLAN+ the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Rebooting the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Navigating the IOLAN+ terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Administering the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Administering an IOLAN+ port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Testing connectivity through the IOLAN+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Potential failure scenarios and repair actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Administering IP services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Call Detail Recording (CDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Connecting CDR equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Administering CDR data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Administering CDR parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Testing the switch-to-adjunct link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
What does the RDTT package contain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Downloading the RDTT package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Installing the RDTT package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Administering the RDTT package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Related topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Installing a loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Selecting the loopback jack installation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Issue 4 May 2009 11

Contents
Administering a loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack . . . . . . . . 235
Checking the integrity of local equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack
to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX) . . . . . 240
Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack . . . . . . 240
Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Configurations using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Checking for the presence of DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
External modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Hardware required when configuring modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configuring the MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Administering Multi-Tech modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U.S. installations . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Music-on-hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450
Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Connecting a non-FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450
using a KS-23395-L3 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
using a KS-23395-L4 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media
Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Connecting an FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using
a KS-23395-L4 coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Paging and announcement equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Hooking up loudspeaker paging from a G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . 255
Adjunct Information Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Call Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Avaya Modular Messaging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Avaya Interactive Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Avaya SIP Enablement Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Call Accounting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Contents
Appendix F: Information Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Installer's Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Serial Number and Login Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
G450 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Logins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Installation Site Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Appendix G: Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Issue 4 May 2009 13

Contents

About this book
Downloading this book and updates from the Web

You can download the latest version of Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media
Gateway from the Avaya Support website. You must have access to the Internet, and a copy of
Acrobat Reader must be installed on your personal computer.
Avaya makes every effort to ensure that the information in this book is complete and accurate.
However, information can change after we publish this book. Therefore, the Avaya Support
website might also contain new product information and updates to the information in this book.
You can also download these updates from the Avaya Support website.
Downloading this book

1. Access the Avaya Support website at http://www.avaya.com/support/.
2. Click FIND DOCUMENTATION and TECHNICAL INFORMATION by PRODUCT NAME.
3. Type this book’s document number (03-602054) in the Search box.
4. Click GO.
The search results appear.
5. Locate the latest version of the book.
6. Click the book title. Your browser downloads the book.
Safety labels and security alert labels

Observe all caution, warning, and danger statements to help prevent loss of service, equipment
damage, personal injury, and security problems. This book uses the following safety labels and
security alert labels:
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: A caution statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to
software, loss of data, or an interruption in service.
Issue 4 May 2009 15

About this book
! WARNING:
WARNING: A warning statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to
hardware or equipment. A warning can also indicate the presence of a hazard
that could cause personal injury if the hazard is not avoided by following the
instructions provided.
! DANGER:
DANGER: A danger statement indicates the presence of a hazard that can result in severe
personal injury or death if the hazard is not avoided by following the instructions
provided.
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT:
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: An ESD warning calls attention to situations that can result in ESD damage to
electronic components.
! SECURITY ALERT:
SECURITY ALERT: A security alert calls attention to a situation that can increase the potential for
unauthorized use of a telecommunications system.

Related resources
Related resources
For more information on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway and related features, see the
following books:
Title Number
Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03-602058

Quick Start for Hardware Installation for the Avaya G450 Media 03-602053
Gateway
Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03-602055
Avaya G450 CLI Reference 03-602056
Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 03-300430
Media Gateways and Servers
Maintenance Commands for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 03-300431
Maintenance Procedures for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 03-300432
Issue 4 May 2009 17

About this book
Technical assistance
Avaya provides resources for technical assistance within the US and internationally.
Within the US
● Call the Avaya Technical Consulting Support System at 1-800-225-7585 for help with
feature administration and system applications.
● Call the Avaya National Customer Care Support Line at 1-800-242-2121 for help with
maintenance and repair.
● Call Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention at 1-800-643-2353 for help with toll fraud.
International
Contact your local Avaya authorized dealer for all international resources.
Trademarks
All trademarks identified by ® or ™ are registered trademarks or trademarks, respectively, of
Avaya Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Sending us comments
Sending us comments
Avaya welcomes your comments about this book. To reach us by:
● Mail, send your comments to:
Avaya Inc.
Product Documentation Group
Room B3-H13
1300 W. 120th Ave.
Westminster, CO 80234 USA
● Email, send your comments to:
document@avaya.com
● Fax, send your comments to:
1-303-538-1741
Ensure that you mention the name and number of this book, Installing and Upgrading the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway, 03-602054.
Issue 4 May 2009 19

About this book

Chapter 1: Before you install
Read this chapter carefully before you begin the installation. If you are installing the G450 at a
customer site, read this chapter before going to the customer site.
Before going to site

Before going to the site, it is necessary to read the planning documentation and prepare
equipment required for installation.
Preparing required equipment

Make sure you have the necessary equipment to assist you in the installation before you start
working.
Equipment required for installation

● One loop start analog trunk for connecting a modem
● A separate telephone line, if needed, for verbal communication during remote
configuration
Equipment required for mounting

● A crosspoint screwdriver if rack mounting or wall mounting the G450
● If you will mount the G450 on a flat wall: screws to fasten the G450 to the wall
● If you will mount the G450 on a non-flat wall:
- A plywood sheet at least ¾ in (1.9 cm) thick and at least 4 x 4 ft (1.2 x 1.2 m) in size
- Wood screws to fasten the G450 to the plywood
- Screws to fasten the plywood board to the wall (pan head at least ¾ in, #10-12 screw)
Issue 4 May 2009 21

Before you install
Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server

● One USB modem. See USB modems supported by the S8300 on page 154 for a list of
USB modems supported by the S8300.
● One USB CD-ROM drive
● A laptop computer with MS Internet Explorer
Equipment required if you are not installing an S8300 Server

● A PC on the local network, optionally with a USB flash drive
● A laptop computer running Windows XP or Windows 2000 with a serial port recognized by
the operating system on the laptop. If the port is recognized, it is listed by the Device
Manager.
● A modem to connect to the G450 to enable dial-in configuration. Use a serial modem
(Multitech MultiModemZBA MT5634ZBA-V-V92) or a USB modem (see USB modems
supported by the G450 on page 154 for a list of the USB modems supported by the G450).
Obtaining the G450 serial number

Look for the serial number sticker on the back of the G450 chassis. If the unit is delivered
directly to the customer and you will not have phone or LAN line access from the customer site
to access the http://rfa.avaya.com website, this task will require a preliminary trip to the
customer site.
Obtaining RFA access

You need to obtain a personal Single Sign-On (SSO) for Remote Feature Activation (RFA)
website authentication login before going to the site for installation. You must complete the
authentication process before you can be assigned an SSO authentication login.
As a first-time user:
● Business Partners should point their browsers to the Business Partner portal option
sales_market, services-voice, training tools and procedures to select RFA
● Associates should point their browsers to the Avaya Associate portal
● Contractors should point their browsers to Avaya.com
● Alternatively go directly to http://rfa.avaya.com.
From that point, log into SSO and complete the process to obtain your personal login.

Checking license file and Avaya Aura Communication

Manager versions for a Local Survivable Processor (LSP)
If you are installing an S8300 as a Local Survivable Processor (LSP), the license file for the
S8300 must have a feature set that is equal to or greater than that of the server that acts as
primary controller (an S8300, S8400, S87xx, or S85xx). This is necessary so that if control
passes to the LSP, it can allow the same level of call processing as that of the primary controller.
Additionally, the LSP must have a version of Avaya Aura Communication Manager (CM) that is
identical to that of the primary controller.
The license file requirements of the LSP should be identified in your planning documentation.
Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop

If you are installing a G450 with an S8300 Server as a primary controller, you need license and
authentication files for the Communication Manager.
1. Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on
your laptop for storing license and authentication files (for example, C:\licenses).
2. Access the Internet from your laptop and go to http://rfa.avaya.com.
3. Login using your SSO login and password. The AFS and RFA information home page
appears.
4. Start the RFA application from the RFA information page. To create and download the
license file and authentication file, follow the instructions outlined in the Avaya Remote
Feature Activation (RFA) User Guide, 03-300149.
5. Use the download or email capabilities of the RFA website to download the license and
authentication files to your laptop.
Once the Communication Manager license and authentication files are downloaded to your PC,
you can use the Avaya Installation Wizard to install them (see Running the Avaya Installation
Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 155. You can also use the Maintenance Web Interface to install the
Communication Manager license and authentication files.
Issue 4 May 2009 23

Before you install
Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART)

for the RAS IP address
The ART tool is a software tool that generates a remote access (RAS) IP address and
password, for accessing a product attached to a customer’s modem. This IP address is
required for configuring remote access to a modem on the S8300 or G450. If you need to
configure remote access to both the G450 and the S8300, follow this procedure twice,
once for the G450 and once for the S8300. For each procedure, a script file is created and
downloaded or emailed to you. You can use the installation script to automatically set up
an IP address and other alarming parameters.
When you run GIW, you will have the opportunity to import the Electronic Planning
Worksheet (EPW). The ART information will be imported along with all the other
information in the EPW. Alternatively, if the G450 will be configured using the CLI, keep the
installation script to run as a CLI command at the configuration stage.
If the G450 will be configured using Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) or Avaya
Installation Wizard (AIW), and you have an EPW, enter the ART information contained in
the installation script into the EPW.
Note:
Note: You must generate and install a License file and Authentication file for the
Communication Manager installed on the S8300, before you use the ART tool.
Follow the applicable process to register the system in the Automatic Registration
Tool (ART). You need an ART user name and password, which you can set up at
the ART website. Provision the IP Address for S8300 Remote Access with
Configure server by using the Set Modem Interface function. Non-Avaya
personnel may need to contact their service support or customer care center for
IP addresses, depending on entitlements.
Obtaining the RAS IP address and password

1. Access the ART website on your laptop at http://art.dr.avaya.com.
2. From the User menu, select Administer an S8xxx, G450, CCS, CVLAN, or ASG
Guard II.
The Enter Network Password dialog box appears.
3. Enter your ART user name and password.
4. Click OK.
The Start of Installation script & IP Addr Admin screen appears.
5. In the FL Number field, enter the customer’s FL number.
6. In the Session Type field, select Installation Script Administration.

7. In the Product Type field, select G450 MEDIA GATEWAY if you want to configure remote
access for the G450, or S8300 SERVER if you want to configure remote access for the
S8300.
8. In the INADS field, enter the number of the telephone line to which you will connect the
modem.
9. Click Start Installation script & IP Addr Admin. ART validates your input and the
Customer Validation screen appears.
10. Read the customer information displayed, to check that it is correct.
11. In the Customer Type field, select Other.
12. Click Continue Installation Script Administration. A product list appears.
13. Click the number of the product for which you are configuring remote access. The G450
MEDIA GATEWAY Installation Script Administration Data screen appears.
14. In the Product Name field, enter the product name.
15. In the INADS Number field, make sure the correct customer provided dial-in number for
the G450 Media Gateway appears.
16. Click Continue Installation Script Administration. ART generates the RAS IP address
and password (CHAP secret key) and generates an installation script for the product. Keep
the RAS IP address and password to configure your modem later.
17. Click Download Installation Script File to download the installation script to your laptop,
or Email Installation Script File to have the script emailed to you.
A script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you.
Downloading recent firmware

Download any recently updated firmware for the G450 and media modules to your laptop. Visit
the Avaya Support website to check the latest firmware image file versions against the factory
installed versions in the hardware you are installing. Download any firmware image file
upgrades you need from the Avaya Support website, and any Communication Manager service
packs that may be required for the upgrade.
Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW)

The EPW is an Excel spreadsheet from which Avaya configuration wizards automatically pull
data to configure and install the S8300 Server and the G450 Media Gateway. The EPW is filled
in by the customer and project manager, and should be completed before installation.
For greatest efficiency, obtain the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) from the Avaya
Support website at http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw.
Issue 4 May 2009 25

Before you install
Site requirements
Inspect the site before you begin the installation. Verify that the site requirements have been
met for adequate environmental conditions, power and grounding availability, safety, and
security conditions. If you find discrepancies between the specifications necessary for proper
installation of equipment and the conditions on site, contact your project manager before
proceeding with the installation.
The G450 may be installed in a 19” rack, mounted on a wall, or placed on a sturdy table.
Installation instructions are provided in Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway on page 29.
The surrounding temperature should be in the range 0-40°C. The humidity should not be higher
than 90%.
Environmental verification
Verify that temperatures and clearances are within the recommended technical parameters.
Consult the table of Technical Specifications in Technical specifications on page 153.
! WARNING:
WARNING: Verify that temperature and clearance ranges are within tolerable limits. The
thermal sensors may shut down equipment if it is subjected to conditions beyond
the recommended limits. Equipment can be damaged if these restrictions are not
respected.
Power verification
Check that an adequate number of power outlets are available. Verify that the G450 Media
Gateway and the other equipment in the rack do not present a possible overcurrent or overload
to the customer's branch circuit and/or power distribution strip. Power requirements are listed in
Power cord specifications on page 154.
! WARNING:
WARNING: Do not overload the power circuit.
Grounding verification
Ensure that the installation site has access to approved grounds and that either a trained
technician or a licensed electrician will be verifying all grounds and installing the Supplementary
Ground Conductor (consult Step 4: Attaching ground conductors on page 40).

Package contents
! WARNING:
WARNING: Installation in a Restricted Access Location and secure access are required in
Finland, Norway, and Sweden. The G450 Media Gateway relies on two ground
connections: first, the mains plugs for the power supplies are required to be
connected to AC outlets that have earth contacts; and second, the Supplementary
Ground Conductor provided with the system provides a non-removable ground even
when the AC cords are disconnected. However, because of unreliable earthing
concerns in Finland, Norway, and Sweden, the G450 Media Gateway must be
installed in a Restricted Access Location (RAL). An RAL is defined as an access
that can be gained only by trained service personnel or customers who have been
instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions
that must be taken. In these cases, access to the G450 Media Gateway is gained by
the use of a tool (such as a lock and key) or other means of security. If you have any
questions about the safety conditions, contact your project manager. When you
have verified that the site is ready for a safe installation, proceed with the
installation.
Package contents
The G450 chassis and accessories are shipped in a box. The package should contain the
following items:
● One Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. The required media modules may be installed.
● One accessories box, containing:
- Two standard mounting brackets
- One mounting bracket with cable guides
- One Supplementary Ground Conductor
- Fifteen 3/8” flat head screws
- One 5/16” crosspoint screw for grounding
- One washer for grounding
- Four rubber feet
- One jumper for bridging NVRAM init pins
The Avaya Partner Contact Closure adjunct box, if ordered, is packaged separately.
Issue 4 May 2009 27

Before you install
Removing power supply units

For ease of installation and to enable single-person installation, it is recommended to remove
the power supply unit(s) before unpacking the G450.
1. Open the package. Note that the G450 is lying flat. Turn it so that the rear panel is facing
up.
2. Remove the power supply unit (PSU). If you ordered two PSUs, remove them both.
a. Loosen the two PSU captive screws, one on each side of the PSU.
b. Grasp the two side handles and pull the PSU up and out.
c. Place the PSU carefully on the table.
Unpacking and checking package contents

1. Unpack the G450 and accessories.
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Wear an anti-static wrist ground strap whenever handling components of an
Avaya G450 Media Gateway. Connect the strap to an approved ground, such as
an unpainted metal surface.
2. Check the contents of the packaging against the customer order.
3. Cross-check the customer order with the planning documentation you have been given.
Media modules, telephones and other equipment are listed on your planning and shipping
documentation. Placement for the media modules and other equipment are also indicated.
4. Verify that all necessary elements have been received and are in good condition. If there
are missing or damaged elements, contact your project manager. The planning
documentation will list contact information for key personnel.
If you have any questions about the equipment order, or if the equipment has been damaged,
contact your project manager.

Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450
Media Gateway
Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway consists of installing the G450 chassis, power supply,
and media modules, attaching ground conductors, and connecting the power.
Step 1: Mounting the G450 chassis

You can mount the G450 in a rack, on a wall, or on a table.
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: When handling any components of an S8300 Server or G450 Media Gateway,
wear an anti-static wrist ground strap. Connect the strap to an approved ground,
such as an unpainted metal surface.
Note:
Note: Avaya has developed special hardware platforms for customers with harsh
environmental conditions. These platforms have been tested to meet stringent
physical and environmental requirements (i.e., shock, vibration, EMI, etc.)
imposed by the United States Navy for use on their ships. The platforms make
use of specialized racks and reinforcements. If you wish to obtain information
about the design and implementation of such a ruggedized solution, contact the
Avaya Navy Shipboard Services organization.
Mounting the G450 in a rack

The G450 mounts in a standard 19-inch rack.
You can fasten the G450 to the rack either at the front of the G450 or at the middle. In either
case, mounting brackets must be attached to the G450.
There are two types of mounting brackets provided with the G450:
● Without cable guides. Two mounting brackets without cable guides are provided.
● With cable guides. One mounting bracket with cable guides is provided. This bracket
provides guides for electrical cables and is useful for cable management.
Issue 4 May 2009 29

Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway
Brackets without cable guides

Mounting brackets without cable guides can be attached in either of the following positions:
● To each side of the front of the G450 for fastening the chassis to the rack at the front
● To the middle of each side panel of the G450 for fastening the chassis to the rack at the
middle
Figure 1: Attaching a mounting bracket to the front of the G450
Figure 2: Attaching a mounting bracket to the middle of the G450
Brackets with cable guides

You can attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the front of the G450 on one side, as
shown in the following figure. If you are fastening the chassis to the rack at the front, use the
mounting bracket with cable guides as one of the two front brackets. If you are fastening the
chassis to the rack at the middle, use the mounting bracket with cable guides at the front of the
chassis, in addition to the two regular mounting brackets on the sides of the chassis. In this
case, the mounting bracket with cable guides serves for cable management only — you do not
fasten it to the rack.

Note:
Note: It is recommended to attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the left
side of the rack, so that the cables will not interfere in the event that you replace
the fan tray. However, if you are installing an MM717 or MM716 media module,
attach the mounting bracket with cable guides to the right side of the rack, to
support the weight of the amphenol cable you will connect to the MM717 media
module. See Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media
module on page 52.
Figure 3: Attaching a mounting bracket with cable guides
Attaching each mounting bracket to the G450

The G450 is held in place by mounting screws through the two mounting ears. Fill racks from
the bottom; that is, mount units in the lower positions first, to avoid balancing problems and
cabling complications.
1. Position a bracket over the desired mounting position.
2. Affix the bracket to the chassis with five of the fifteen 6-32 x 3/8 screws provided.
3. Tighten with a screwdriver.
Before mounting the G450

● Ensure that the rack is bolted to the floor and is earthquake-protected, if required. If the
rack is not securely fixed in place, do not proceed with the installation.
● If the G450 is being mounted in a rack with other equipment already installed, the G450
must be positioned to avoid imbalance.
Note:
Note: The G450 weighs 21 pounds (9.5 kg) empty and between 37.5 and 39.5 pounds
(between 17 and 18 kg) when equipped with media modules, an S8300 Server,
and two power supply units.
Issue 4 May 2009 31

Mounting the G450 in the rack

The G450 is designed for single-person mounting. This assumes that the power supplies were
removed (see Removing power supply units on page 28).
1. Insert two mounting screws, one on either side of the rack. These will be the bottom
screws of the mounting brackets. Turn the screws only 3-4 times, so that a part of them is
protruding.
2. Position the G450 in the rack so that the bottoms of the brackets are resting on the
protruding screws.
3. Position the G450 in the rack. Ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
4. Insert four rack mounting screws, two on each side.
5. Verify that the G450 is level and horizontal.
6. Tighten the rack mounting screws. Avoid overtightening.
7. Either tighten the two bottom-most screws inserted in step 1, or remove them completely.
8. Verify that ventilation vents are not obstructed.
At this point, you have mounted the G450 chassis in the rack and are ready to insert media
modules as required in the planning documentation.
Mounting the G450 on a wall

To mount the G450 on a wall, use the two mounting brackets without cable guides. You can also
add a mounting bracket with cable guides if desired, as explained in Brackets with cable
guides on page 30.
! WARNING:
WARNING: Only service-trained personnel are to wall-mount the G450.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: A fully loaded G450 weighs 40 pounds (18 kg). It weighs 30 pounds (13.4 kg) if
both power supply units were removed. Use lifting precautions. A minimum of two
installers is required to wall-mount a G450.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: If you are installing the G450 in the United States of America:
● The AC power supply cord must not be attached to the building wall, for example with
wire staples, clamps, and so on.
● You must install the G450 near the AC receptacle (socket outlet) that services the
G450.

● You must install the AC power supply cord in a way that minimizes the risk of physical
damage to the cord. The cord must not be hanging on the floor, or routed in any way
that can subject it to physical abuse.
Attaching brackets to the G450 for wall mounting

Attach a bracket to each side of the G450, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4: Attaching a bracket to each side of the G450
Fastening the G450 to the wall
Note:
Note: The plywood and the hardware to mount the plywood are customer-provided.
1. If the wall does not have a portion of plywood available, mount a plywood sheet at least
¾ in (1.9 cm) thick and at least 4 x 4 ft (1.2 x 1.2 m) in size, horizontally onto the wall.
Make sure the plywood is sufficiently anchored in the wall. Use a minimum of four wood
screws and ensure the screws are driven into wall studs, or use four wall anchors rated not
less than 50 pounds (22.5 kg) shear strength each.
2. Mark the plywood with the location of the G450 bracket screw holes before fastening the
plywood to the wall.
3. Position the G450 so that its front panel is facing up, and secure it to the plywood using a
minimum of four screws (pan head at least ¾ in, #10-12 screw).
Placing the G450 on a table

If you will be installing the G450 as a tabletop unit, affix the provided rubber feet to the
underside of the G450.
1. Remove the four feet from their packaging.
2. Turn the G450 upside down.
Issue 4 May 2009 33

3. Position each foot into one of the mounting sites, near each corner of the chassis.
Step 2: Installing the Power Supply Units

When the G450 chassis is installed, first insert the power supply unit(s) if you removed them
before installation (refer to Removing power supply units on page 28).
1. Position the power supply unit before the opening at the rear of the G450 and engage both
sides of the PSU in the interior guides.
2. Slide the PSU slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the
PSU does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides.
3. Close and tighten the two PSU captive screws, one on each side of the PSU.
Figure 5: Inserting the power supply unit
Step 3: Installing the media modules

When the G450 chassis is installed and the power supply unit(s) have been inserted, you can
insert the media modules. Each module is shipped with two thumb screws for securing the
module in the G450 chassis.
Note:
Note: The required media modules are sometimes pre-installed in the G450 chassis. If
this is the case, skip this step. Read this section only if the media modules are not
pre-installed, or if you want to replace modules or add new media modules.

Before inserting media modules into the G450 chassis

● Do not install an unsupported combination of media modules. See Combination
limitations on page 35.
● Allocate a permissible slot to each media module. See Allocating slots on page 35.
! WARNING:
WARNING: The G450 must not be operated with any open slots. Failure to cover empty slots
with the supplied blank plates can cause overheating due to inadequate air
distribution.
Combination limitations
The following limitations apply to combining media modules in the G450:
● Three MM340/MM342 WAN modules
● The MM760 is not supported
Allocating slots
The G450 chassis has eight media module slots, marked V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, V7, V8 (see
Figure 6). Each media module is restricted to certain slots.
Allocate a slot for the media module. Make sure your slot allocations allow a permissible slot for
every media module.
Issue 4 May 2009 35

Figure 6: The G450 front panel ports and slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11
12 16
13 17
14 18
15 19
Figure notes:
1. System LEDs 11. ASB button

2. USB ports 12. V1 — slot for standard media module or
3. Console port S8300 Server
4. Services port 13. V2 — slot for standard media module
5. Compact flash slot 14. V3 — slot for standard media module
6. ETR (Emergency Transfer Relay) port 15. V4 — slot for standard media module
7. CCA (Contact Closure) port 16. V5 — slot for standard media module
8. ETH WAN ports 17. V6 — slot for standard media module
9. ETH LAN ports 18. V7 — slot for standard media module
10. RST button 19. V8 — slot for standard media module
Table 1: Permitted slots for media modules
Media module Permitted slots Description
MM340 V3, V4, V8 Provides one E1/T1 WAN port for connecting to a
WAN endpoint device.
MM342 V3, V4, V8 Provides one USP WAN port for connecting to a WAN
endpoint device.
MM710 V1 – V8 Provides one E1/T1 trunk port for connecting an
E1/T1 telephone trunk.
MM711 V1 – V8 Provides eight universal analog ports for connecting
analog telephones or trunks.
MM712 V1 – V8 Provides eight ports for connecting DCP telephones.
MM714 V1 – V8 Provides four analog ports for analog telephones and
four analog ports for analog trunks.
1 of 2

Table 1: Permitted slots for media modules (continued)
Media module Permitted slots Description
MM714B V1 – V8 Provides four analog ports for analog telephones, four

analog ports for analog trunks, and an emergency
transfer relay.
MM716 V1 – V8 Provides one amphenol connector that connects to a
punch down block to provide 24 analog line ports.
MM717 V1 – V8 Provides one amphenol connector that connects to a
punch down block to provide 24 ports for connecting
DCP telephones.
MM720 V1 – V8 Provides eight ports for connecting up to eight ISDN
trunks or 16 ISDN BRI stations.
MM722 V1 – V8 Provides two ports for connecting ISDN trunks.
S8300B/S8300C V1 Server
2 of 2
Inserting the S8300 Server module

The S8300 can only be inserted in slot V1 on the left side of the G450 Media Gateway.
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold media modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do
not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. If possible, wear an anti-static
wrist-strap and use an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly, or if
misaligned and then forced into position.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: Separate ESD paths to the chassis ground connect to the media modules at the
spring-loaded captive screws. Use a screwdriver to ensure the captive screws are
securely tightened to prevent damage to the equipment.
1. If you are inserting an S8300/B module, remove the plate above slot V1, labelled “Remove
before removing or inserting S8300 module”.
2. Remove the blank plate from slot V1.
3. Position the media module before the V1 bay opening and engage both sides of the
module in the interior guides.
Issue 4 May 2009 37

4. Slide the S8300 module slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure
that the module does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides.
Figure 7: Inserting the S8300 Server module
5. Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors.

The connector has pins of different lengths. The long pins engage first to provide
grounding. Medium length and short pins provide power and signal.
6. Lock the S8300 Server module into the chassis by tightening the spring-loaded captive
screws on the front of the module.
7. If you are inserting an S8300/B module, replace the plate labelled “Remove before
removing or inserting S8300 module” above slot V1 and tighten the screws on the front of
the plate.
After you have inserted the S8300 Server module, if applicable, insert the rest of the media
modules. Make sure to insert each module in a permissible slot.
! DANGER:
DANGER: To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure
continued compliance to radiated emissions requirements, all captive screws
must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of
a tool.

Inserting media modules

After you have inserted the S8300 Server module, if applicable, insert the rest of the media
modules. Make sure to insert each module in a permissible slot. Remove the blank plate from
the empty bay.
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold media modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do
not touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. If possible, wear a wrist-strap and
use an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: Separate ESD paths to the chassis ground connect to the media modules at the
spring-loaded captive screws. Use a screwdriver to ensure the captive screws are
securely tightened to prevent damage to the equipment.
1. Position the media module before the selected bay on the front of the G450 chassis and
engage both sides of the module in the interior guides.
2. Slide the module slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the
module does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides.
Figure 8: Inserting a media module
3. Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors. The media module connector has pins of
different lengths. The long pins engage first to provide grounding. Medium length and short
pins provide power and signal.
Issue 4 May 2009 39

4. Lock the media module into the chassis by tightening the spring-loaded captive screws on
the front of the module.
! DANGER:
DANGER: To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure
continued compliance to international radiated emissions requirements, all
captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened
without the use of a tool.
! WARNING:
WARNING: After you have connected telephones to the various media modules, be sure to
add circuit protection to the lines.
Step 4: Attaching ground conductors

To assure safe installation and operation, carefully read all requirements, recommendations,
and instructions. Pay special attention to all CAUTION, WARNING, and DANGER statements.
! WARNING:
WARNING: System grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding provided in
Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Fire Protection Agency
(NFPA) 70, or the applicable electrical code in the country of installation.
General grounding requirements

Two safety grounds are required to ensure safe operation of the G450 Media Gateway: the
ground conductor that is part of the AC power cord, and the field-installed green/yellow
conductor referred to as the Supplementary Ground Conductor. Both safety grounds must be
connected to an approved ground. If a power cord accompanies the G450, use that cord
whenever possible.
Installation location
Select a location for the G450 installation that is no more than 25 ft (7.6 m) from an approved
ground or close enough for use with the supplied secondary grounding conductor. If this
location requirement is not met, contact a licensed electrician to install a Supplementary Ground
Conductor per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC).

! WARNING:
WARNING: If the installation location is greater than the length of the supplied secondary
grounding conductor from an approved ground, do not install the G450 until a
licensed electrician is present to install a Supplementary Ground Conductor.
Ground conductor
A Supplementary Ground Conductor is provided with the equipment, and is constructed of
10 AWG (4.0 mm2) wire, with an insulated ring terminal crimped to one end that is suitable for
the #8 (M4) stud/screw on the rear of the G450 chassis.
The customer will need to provide a means of connecting this Supplementary Ground
Conductor to an approved ground according to Article 250 of the National Electrical Code
(NEC).
Ground block
A ground block is available for use when multiple G450 Media Gateways are being installed.
The ground block, intended for rack mounting, has ten terminals available for terminating
Supplementary Ground Conductors. Up to ten G450 Media Gateways can be grounded at the
block installed close to the equipment (on a rack) and then a single ground conductor can be
routed from the same block to an approved ground. If the ground block is to be used, you must
supply it and have it installed by an electrician.
! DANGER:
DANGER: Failure to install both grounds will void the Product Safety certifications (UL and
the CE Mark) on the product, as well as allow a hazard to be present that could
result in death or severe personal injury.
Restricted Access Location

In Finland, Norway, and Sweden, the G450 Media Gateway must be installed in a Restricted
Access Location, due to unreliable earthing concerns. A Restricted Access Location is defined
as access that can be gained by only Service Personnel or Customers who have been
instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions that must be
taken. In these cases, access to the G450 is gained by the use of a tool (such as a lock and
key) or other means of security.
Issue 4 May 2009 41

! WARNING:
WARNING: For installations in Finland, Norway, and Sweden, the Avaya G450 Media
Gateway relies on two ground connections (mains plug with an earth contact, and
a Supplementary Ground Conductor).
Approved grounds
An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance
protector, entrance cable shield, or a single-point ground of electronic telephony equipment. If
more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises, the grounds must be
bonded together as required in Section 250-81 of the NEC for the US or per the local electrical
code regulations in the country of installation.
● Grounded Building Steel. The metal frame of the building where it is effectively grounded
by one of the following grounds: acceptable metallic water pipe, concrete encased ground,
or a ground ring.
● Acceptable Water Pipe. A metal underground water pipe, at least 1/2 in (1.3 cm) in
diameter, in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 ft (3m). The pipe must be
electrically continuous (or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints,
plastic pipe, or plastic water meters) to the point where the protector ground wire connects.
A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the
building, a concrete-encased ground, or a ground ring. If these grounds are not available,
the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of the following types of grounds:
- Other local metal underground systems or structures, such as tanks and piping
systems.
- Rod and pipe electrodes. A 5/8 in (1.6 cm) solid rod or 3/4 in (2 cm) conduit or pipe
electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 ft (2.4 m).
- Plate electrodes. Must have a minimum of 2 sq. ft (0.185 sq. m) of metallic surface
exposed to the exterior soil.
● Concrete Encased Ground. An electrode encased by at least 2 in (5.1 cm) of concrete and
located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with
the earth. The electrode must be at least 20 ft (6.1 m) of one or more steel reinforcing bars
or rods, 1/2 in (1.3 cm) in diameter, or at least 20 ft (6.1 m) of bare solid copper, 4 AWG
(26 mm2) wire.
● Ground Ring. A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at least
2.5 ft (0.76 m) below the earth’s surface. The ground ring must be at least 20 ft (6.1 m) of
2 AWG (35 mm2) bare copper wire.
● Approved Floor Grounds. Floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high-rise
building that are suitable for connection to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the
cabinet single-point ground terminal. Approved floor grounds may include the following:
- Building steel.

- The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding the
floor.
- Metallic water pipes.
- Power-feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor.
- A grounding point specifically provided in the building for that purpose.
! WARNING:
WARNING: If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a
dedicated power equipment room, then connections to this ground must be made
by a licensed electrician.
Connecting the safety ground

Proper grounding of the G450 installation safeguards the system, users, and service personnel
by providing protection from lightning, power surges, AC mains faults, power crosses on central
office trunks, and electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Local electrical installation codes must be followed when installing the G450.
! DANGER:
DANGER: Connection of both grounds (through the AC Power Cord and the Supplementary
Ground Conductor) is required for safe operation of the G450.
! WARNING:
WARNING: An improper ground can cause electrical shock as well as equipment failures and
service outages.
Attaching the ground wires

1. Place the ring terminal of the 10 AWG (4.0 mm2) Supplementary Ground Conductor on the
ground screw that was provided in the accessories box.
2. Insert the ground screw on the rear of the chassis adjacent to the ground symbol and
securely tighten the screw such that it cannot be loosened without the use of a tool.
If the ground block has been purchased

1. Cut the Supplementary Ground Conductor (which has one end attached to the grounding
screw on the chassis) to the length needed to terminate it into one of the terminals of the
ground block. Do not coil the Supplementary Ground Conductor.
2. Attach one end of the remaining 10 AWG (4 mm2) ground wire to one of the terminals in
the ground block and the other end to an approved ground.
Issue 4 May 2009 43

3. Cut this ground wire to the length needed to reach the approved ground. Do not coil this
wire.
Note:
Note: The ground block is provided for use with more than one G450 in the rack. It is
usually mounted by the customer’s electrician.
If the ground block is not being used

1. Attach the Supplementary Ground Conductor to an approved ground.
2. Connect the AC power cable to the inlet receptacle on the rear of the chassis.
Step 5: Connecting power to the G450

After you have mounted the G450, installed the PSU(s), installed the media modules, and
attached grounding conductors, you can connect power to the G450. The G450 can be ordered
with either one or two power supply units.
1. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the G450 back panel.
2. Plug the power cable into a mains socket. The G450 is now powered.
The PWR LED on the front panel lights. The CPU LED lights up if the firmware is running.
At least one LED on each media module, except the S8300, lights up initially and then
goes off after about 20 seconds.
3. If you have a second power supply unit, you can connect it to power by repeating steps 1
and 2.
Note:
Note: If two PSUs are installed in the G450, the PWR LED blinks if only one PSU is
connected to power, and stays on if both PSUs are connected to power.

Step 5: Connecting power to the G450
PWR LED indications

The PWR LED on the power supply unit indicates the operational status of the power supply
unit.
Table 2: Power Supply Unit PWR LED
LED Name State Color Indication
PWR Power On Green Power is OK

On Red A power fault
Off The PSU unit is broken or not powered
Issue 4 May 2009 45


Chapter 3: Connecting devices
External endpoint devices can be connected to the ports on the front panels of the installed
media modules and to the fixed front panel ports. Before you connect endpoint devices, the
G450 should be mounted and all media modules should be inserted.
! WARNING:
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords
when installing telephones or adjuncts, or connecting to any media module
telecommunication ports.
! WARNING:
WARNING: Attention: Pour réduire les risques d’incendie, utiliser uniquement des conductors
de télécommmunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure. Pour réduire les
risques d'incendie, veuillez n'utiliser que des fils de lignes télécommmunications
de 26 AWG ou de section supérieure, lorsque vous connectez des téléphones,
des équipements complémentaires, ou pour toute connexion aux ports
télécommunications d'une quelconque carte d'équipement.
Step 1: Connecting data and voice devices

There are various possible ways of connecting different devices. See your planning
documentation for any topology requirements to connect specific devices to specific ports. As
you connect devices, keep a record of the slots and ports into which specific devices are
connected. You will need this information when configuring the G450.
Connecting a switch or a network data port

The G450 can provide network switching and also supports the connection of switches. You can
connect the following to either of the ETH LAN ports on the G450 front panel:
● One or more LAN switches
● The network data ports in the office
Issue 4 May 2009 47

Connecting devices
Connecting a computer
You can connect a computer to any of the following:
● A switch connected to the G450
● One of the following ports on the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis:
- The ETH LAN ports
- The ETH WAN ports
● The Console port on the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis
● The Services port on the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis
To connect the computer to the ETH LAN, ETH WAN, or Console ports, a straight network cable
with an RJ-45 connector or a crossover cable with an RJ-45 connector must be used.
Connecting a computer to the Services port

A laptop connected directly to the Services port of the G450 requires a specific configuration of
its network settings.
Note:
Note: Make a record of any IP addresses, DNS servers, or WINS entries that you
change when you configure your services laptop. Unless you use the NetSwitcher
program or an equivalent, you will need to restore these entries to connect to
other networks.
1. Set the laptop's TCP/IP properties as follows:
- IP address: 192.11.13.5
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252
- Disable DNS service
- Disable WINS Resolution
2. Disable the proxy server in the laptop’s Internet browser settings.
3. Connect the laptop computer to the G450 Services port, using an Ethernet cable.
4. SSH to 192.11.13.6.
Connecting an IP telephone
Note:
Note: For a full list of supported phones, see Appendix B, Supported Avaya telephones
in Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602058.

Connect the IP telephone to an external Ethernet switch. This switch must be connected to a
LAN port on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. This port is labeled 10/5 or 10/6.
If the telephone is not an Avaya IP telephone, you can connect it to any port on the network
switch. Note the slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which you connect
the telephone.
Connecting the telephone to the G450

1. Wire a telephone port to a port on the switch connected to the G450 LAN port. If the switch
is a PoE switch, you do not need to plug the IP telephone into a power supply.
2. Plug the telephone into the telephone port.
3. If the IP telephone will be powered independently, plug the IP telephone into a power
supply and check that the IP telephone is powered up.
Connecting an ISDN BRI station

Each ISDN port on the MM720 media module supports up to two ISDN BRI stations.
Note:
Note: The MM720 BRI media module cannot be administered to support both BRI
trunks and BRI stations at the same time. However, the MM720 BRI media
module supports combining both B-channels together to form a 128-kbps
channel. CM 3.1 enables combining B-channels, using BONDing, to form a
higher bandwidth connection.
Finally, if the MM720 BRI media module is administered to support BRI stations, it
cannot be used as a clock synchronization source.
Connecting one ISDN BRI station to one ISDN port

Connect the station via a standard 8-pin BRI cable to one of the ISDN ports on an MM720
media module.
Connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port

1. Connect each station to an RJ-45 splitter that provides two RJ-45 4-pair jacks, and one
RJ-45 male connector. See Figure 9 for the correct wiring for the splitter.
2. Connect the male connector of the splitter to one of the ISDN ports on an MM720 media
module.
Issue 4 May 2009 49

Connecting devices
Figure 9: RJ-45 splitter wiring for connecting two ISDN BRI stations to one ISDN port
Figure 10: The MM720 media module
Connecting an analog telephone

Note:
1. Wire a telephone port to one of the following analog ports:
- A universal analog port on an MM711 media module
- Any analog line port on a punch down block connected to an MM716 media module.
To connect the MM716 media module to a punch down block to enable telephone
connection, see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on
page 55.
- A LINE port on an MM714 or MM714B media module
2. Plug the analog telephone into the telephone port.

Figure 13: The MM714B media module
Note:
Note: Analog line ports support the following maximum distances:
- For phone equipment with a ringer load above 3 REN (old mechanical ringers):
- Up to 10,000 ft for 26 AWG wire
- For modern phone equipment with a ringer load below 0.1 REN (electronic
ringers):
- Up to 20,000 ft for 26 AWG, 24 AWG, and 22 AWG wire
Issue 4 May 2009 51

Connecting devices
Connecting a DCP telephone to an

MM712 or MM717 media module
Note:
1. Wire a telephone port to a DCP port on the G450.
The following media modules provide DCP telephone ports:
- MM712. Eight DCP ports
- MM717. Twenty four DCP ports, provided via a single 25-pair amphenol socket on the
front panel. To connect the MM717 media module to a punch down block to enable
telephone connection, see Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media
modules on page 55.
2. Plug the DCP telephone into the telephone port.

! WARNING:
WARNING: With the exception of the MM712, all DCP media modules are intended for
in-building use only. Phone lines connected to these ports are not to be routed
out-of-building. Failure to comply with this could cause harm to personnel and
equipment.
Note:
Note: The MM712 and MM717 and media modules support the following maximum loop
lengths:
- Up to 5500 ft for 22 AWG wire
Connecting an analog trunk

Connect the trunk to one of the following ports:
● Any universal analog port on an MM711 media module
● Any analog line port on a punch down block connected to an MM716 media module. To
connect the MM716 media module to a punch down block to enable trunk connection, see
Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules on page 55.
Note:
Note: The MM716 media module does not support analog CO or CAMA trunks.
● One of the ports marked TRUNK on an MM714 or MM714B media module
Note:
Note: For an analog DID trunk, you cannot use a TRUNK port on an MM714 or
MM714B media module. Instead, you must connect the trunk to one of the ports
marked LINE on an MM711, MM714, MM714B, or MM716 media module.
Issue 4 May 2009 53

Connecting devices
Connecting an E1/T1 trunk

Connect the trunk cable to the E1/T1 port on an MM710 media module. The SIG LED lights.
Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk

Connect the trunk to any ISDN port on an MM720 or MM722 media module.
Note:
Note: In the US, you need to connect a separately purchased NT1 device to each ISDN
port you use to connect an ISDN BRI trunk.

Connecting devices to the MM717 and MM716 media modules

The MM716 and MM717 media modules do not support direct connection of telephones or
other endpoint devices. The MM716 and MM717 media modules each have a single 25-pair
amphenol socket on the front panel, intended for use with a punch down block. Connect the
front panel connector to a punch down block. You can terminate up to 24 endpoint devices on
the connected punch down block.
Connecting the MM716 or MM717 front panel connector

to a punch down block
1. Connect one end of a CAT5 cable with a 25-pair amphenol connector at each end to the
25-pair socket on the MM716 or MM717 front panel, so that the cable extends to the right
of the G450. (The cable you use must be such that the connector you plug into the media
module is 90° to the cable.)
2. Tighten the end screw of the amphenol connector to securely fasten the connector to the
left side of the front panel socket.
3. Thread a tie wrap through the small bracket to the right of the front panel socket.
4. Fasten the tie wrap around the cable to secure the cable to the right side of the front panel
socket.
Figure 20: Attaching and securing the amphenol cable to the MM716 or MM717 25-pair
socket
5. Connect the other end of the amphenol cable to a punch down block that converts the
single amphenol connector to 24 RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as needed. You can now connect
endpoint devices to the RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks. For the pin-out of the 25-pair connector, see
Table 20.
Issue 4 May 2009 55

Connecting devices
Step 2: Installing circuit protection

Out-of-building installations of telephones or other standard (tip/ring) devices/terminals that
connect to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway media modules require over-voltage and sneak
current protection in both buildings. Field installed sneak current protectors must have a
maximum current rating of 350 mA and a minimum voltage rating of 600V. The following devices
have been evaluated or tested and approved to protect the media modules from over-voltages
and sneak current protection:
● For the Avaya MM710 or MM340 T1/E1. Over-voltage and sneak current protection for the
Avaya MM710 and MM340 are provided on the media modules themselves.
● For the Avaya MM711, MM714, MM714B, and MM716 Analog. Over-voltage and sneak
current protection for these interfaces is provided on the media modules/interfaces.
Incoming trunks normally have over-voltage protection provided by the local telephone
company. Analog voice terminals use one of the following types of combined over-voltage
and sneak current protection at both building entry points:
- Gas tube with heat coil. 4B1E-W
- Solid state with heat coil. 4C1S
- IROB. 146C (4-lines) or 146F (25-lines)
● For the Avaya MM712 DCP: either 146E IROB (In-Range Out-of-Building) or 4C3S-75
solid state protectors for over-voltage and sneak current.
● For the Avaya MM722 ISDN-BRI: over-voltage and sneak current protection are provided
on the media modules themselves.
● For the Avaya MM720 ISDN-BRI: network-side applications require an NT-1 device. Tie
trunk applications require either the 146E IROB (In-Range Out-of-Building) or 4C3S-75
solid state protectors for over-voltage and sneak current.

Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN)
! WARNING:
WARNING: Only service-trained personnel are to install these circuit protection devices.
! WARNING:
WARNING: With the exception of the MM712, all DCP media modules are intended for
in-building use only. Phone lines connected to these ports are not to be routed
out-of-building. Failure to comply with this could cause harm to personnel and
equipment.
Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN)

Since the G450 contains an internal router, you can connect the G450 directly to a WAN
endpoint device. You can also connect a WAN endpoint device to the G450 via an external
router.
Connecting a WAN to the G450

There are some differences in how to connect the WAN, depending on the type of WAN link you
are connecting.
Connecting a WAN link to the MM342 media module

You must connect the WAN link to a device connected to the Avaya MM342 media module.
To connect the WAN link, plug the WAN line into the USP port on the MM342 media module.
This port is marked USP. To connect the WAN line to the port, use one of the following cable
types, depending on the service provider’s equipment:
● Avaya Serial Cable DTE V.35
● Avaya Serial Cable DTE X.21
Issue 4 May 2009 57

Connecting devices
Connecting an E1/T1 WAN link to the MM340 media module

To connect the WAN link, plug the WAN line into the E1/T1 port on the MM340 media module.
This port is marked E1/T1. Use an unshielded twisted pair cable, straight or crossover,
depending on the WAN equipment.
Connecting an Ethernet WAN link

You must connect the Ethernet WAN line (DSL, firewall, etc.) to the Ethernet WAN port on the
front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. This port is marked ETH WAN. See
Figure 6. Use a CAT5 Ethernet cable to connect the WAN line to the port.
Connecting an external router to the G450

You can connect a router to any of the following ports on the G450:
● The ETH WAN ports on the G450 front panel
● The ETH LAN ports on the G450 front panel
Step 4: Installing the Coupled Bonding Conductor

The Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) provides mutual inductance coupling between the CBC
and the telephone cables that are exposed to lightning. The conductor can be a 10 AWG
(4 mm2) wire tie wrapped to the exposed cables, a metal cable shield around the exposed
cables, or six spare pairs from the exposed cable. In a high-rise building, connect the CBC to an
approved building ground on each floor.

Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct
Installing the CBC

Before you begin, be sure the telephone lines are cross-connected to the appropriate media
module(s).
1. Connect one end of the conductor to a telephone cable building entrance protector ground
that is connected to an approved ground.
2. Route the rest of the conductor next to the exposed telephone cables being protected until
they reach the cross-connect nearest to the telephone system.
3. Terminate the other end to the single-point ground block provided for the telephone
system.
Note:
Note: Position the non-exposed telephone cables at least 12 in (30.5 cm) away from
exposed telephone cables whenever possible.
Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure

Adjunct
The Contact Closure feature is a controllable relay providing dry contacts for various
applications. To implement the contact closure feature, you connect an Avaya Partner Contact
Closure Adjunct box to the CCA port on the G450 chassis. The adjunct box provides two
contact closures that can be operated in either a “normally closed” or “normally open” state. The
contact closures can control auxiliary devices such as devices that automatically lock or unlock
doors or voice recording units. The CCA port can be configured so that the connected devices
can be controlled by an end device, such as a telephone. For example, a user can unlock a
door by keying a sequence into a telephone keypad.
Installing the contact closure

1. Follow the installation instructions in the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct
Installation Instructions leaflet to install the Contact Closure and connect the auxiliary
devices that will be activated and deactivated by the Contact Closure relays.
2. Note which device is connected to each relay. You will need this information for
configuration.
3. Connect the Avaya Partner Contact Closure adjunct box to the CC port on the G450 front
panel. Use a 24 gauge minimum telephone wire, no longer than 200 ft, with a standard four
wire RJ-11 connector.
Issue 4 May 2009 59

Connecting devices
Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and

associated telephones
The ETR feature provides basic telephone services in the event of system failure, such as a
power outage or a failed connection to the MGC. The ETR feature can be used in conjunction
with an analog media module (MM711, MM714, MM714B, or MM716). The ETR panel provides
up to five incoming Central Office (CO) trunk loops to 5 selected G450 analog lines. Thus, one
ETR panel supports up to five emergency lines. You can cascade a second ETR panel,
providing support for up to 10 emergency analog phones. ETR is activated automatically upon
system failure by closing the tip/ring contacts between the analog lines and the analog trunks.
When ETR is activated, all calls are directed by the analog relays between the outside lines and
the analog telephones. A current-loop detection circuit prevents ongoing calls from being
disconnected when normal functioning resumes. If a call is in progress on an outside line when
the problem ends, the call continues. The trunk port and analog line port passing through the
ETR panel do not start to operate until the active call ends.
For information on installing the 808A Emergency Transfer Panel, see 808A Emergency
Transfer Panel Installation Instructions, 03-602518, which ships with the Emergency Transfer
Panel.

Step 6: Installing an 808A Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones
Figure 23: 808A Emergency Transfer Panel
Emergency CABLE
Transfer RETAINER
Panel
RATING
LED POWER -48V DC

0.08A
TRUNK / TEST SWITCHES 25-PAIR

MALE
CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
1
1 2
2 1 LOOP GROUND
TRUNK TYPE 3
4 2 START START
SELECTION 5
SWITCHES 6 3
7 TRUNK OPTION:
8 4 BOTH SWITCHES MUST BE
9
THROWN TO ACTIVATE
10 5 TRUNK OPTION
TEST 12 TRANSFER TEST SWITCH
SWITCH ACTIVATED NORMAL
OPERATION
TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
TRUNK
LINE EXT LOC
TRUNK
IDENTIFICATION
LABEL
808A
cycmfig1 LAO 082107
Issue 4 May 2009 61

Connecting devices

Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a
modem for remote access
You can connect a modem to the G450 to enable configuration from a remote location. A serial
modem connected to the G450 can also be used for the modem dial backup feature, which
provides a redundant connectivity with a remote primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC).
Modem dial backup provides better survivability than switching to a secondary MGC, since
more features are preserved.
If an S8300 is installed in the G450, leave a modem connected permanently to enable reporting
of alarms to remote locations.
Note:
Note: If you choose to configure the G450 by running an installation wizard, you can
enable a modem with the wizard as part of the configuration. Instructions for
connecting the modem are included in Appendix C: Running the Avaya
Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 155 and in Appendix D: Running the
Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 189. You do not need to read this
chapter.
Connecting and enabling a modem (G450 without S8300)

You can either connect a serial modem to the Console port on the G450 front panel or you can
connect a USB modem to either of the two USB ports on the G450 front panel.
Connecting and enabling a serial modem

1. Prepare a PC with a CD-ROM drive and a TFTP server on the network. This may be
needed for installing software and firmware upgrades.
Note:
Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300 using TFTP, you may need to enable
TFTP service in the Set LAN Security parameters of your web server.
Note:
Note: Firmware upgrades for the G450 and media modules can either be installed from
CD or downloaded from the Web.
Issue 4 May 2009 63

Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access
2. Download Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) from the Avaya Support website
(support.avaya.com/avaygiw) to the laptop computer. The laptop should be running
Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support GIW.
3. Plug one end of the provided flat RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable into the provided DB-9 adapter.
4. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the Console port of the G450.
5. Plug the DB-9 end of the flat cable into the COM port of the laptop computer.
6. From your laptop computer, double-click the GIW icon to run GIW. The Overview screen
appears.
7. Click Continue. The Gateway Connection Details screen appears.
8. Select Select if this is any Gateway other than G430.
9. Click Continue until the Modem Type Selection screen appears.
10. Select Serial Modem.
11. Click Continue. The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen appears.
Figure 24: G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen
12. In the IP Address field, enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the ART
tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on
page 24.
13. Fill in the remaining modem information fields.

14. Select the authentication method:

● If you have an Avaya Service contract, check Enable ASG Authentication to enable
remote access to the device.
● If you do not have an Avaya Service contract:
- Check Enable CHAP Authentication.
- In the CHAP Secret field, enter the CHAP secret key obtained using the ART tool.
See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on
page 24.
- In the Confirm CHAP Secret field, re-enter the CHAP secret key.
15. Click Continue. The Connect Modem screen appears.
Figure 25: Connect Modem screen
16. Click Finish.

17. Connect the serial modem to a working telephone line.
18. Connect the provided DB-25 adapter to the modem.
19. Disconnect the flat cable from the COM port of the laptop computer.
20. Connect the flat cable to the DB-25 connector on the modem.
Issue 4 May 2009 65

Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 without S8300)

You can enable a USB modem on a USB port on the G450 front panel. See USB modems
supported by the G450 on page 154 for a list of the USB modems supported by the G450
Note:
Note: If you have an Avaya Service contract, no configuration is necessary for Services
personnel to remotely access the gateway through a USB modem.
Note:
Note:
CD or downloaded from the Web.
2. Download GIW (Gateway Installation Wizard) from the Avaya Support website
(support.avaya.com/avaygiw) to the laptop computer. The laptop should be running
4. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the Console port of the G450.
appears.
9. Click Continue until the Modem Type Selection screen appears.
10. Select USB Modem.
11. Click Continue. The G450 USB Modem Configuration screen appears.

Figure 26: G450 USB Modem Configuration screen
12. In the PPP IP Address field, enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using the
ART tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on
page 24.
13. Enter the PPP Subnet Mask.
14. Select the authentication method:
● If you have an Avaya Service contract, check Enable ASG Authentication to enable
remote access to the device.
- In the CHAP Secret field, enter the CHAP secret key obtained using the ART tool.
See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on
page 24.
15. Click Continue until you exit the Gateway Installation Wizard.
16. Click Finish.
17. Connect a USB modem to a working telephone line.
18. Connect one end of a USB cable to the modem.
Issue 4 May 2009 67

19. Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on the G450 front panel.
Testing the modem connection (G450 without S8300)

Dial into the modem to verify that you can authenticate to the modem.

Connecting and enabling a USB modem (G450 with S8300)

You can connect a USB modem to either of the two USB ports on the G450 front panel.
Maintenance web pages

Most of the preparations you are making require you to access the Maintenance web pages part
of Avaya Integrated Management (AIM) from your laptop. After accessing the Maintenance web
pages, leave the Maintenance web pages open until you have completed all the preparations.
Accessing the Maintenance web pages

1. Connect the laptop you prepared to the Services port on the S8300. Use a standard
Ethernet crossover cable.
2. Configure the network settings on the laptop, according to the following tables:
Table 3: TCP/IP settings
Setting Value
IP Address 192.11.13.5
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.252
DNS disable
WINS Servers do not use (clear out any values)
Table 4: Internet Browser Settings
Setting Value
Proxy Server disable
3. Open Internet Explorer, and browse to 192.11.13.6. The welcome screen for Avaya
Integrated Management appears.
4. Click Continue. The Logon screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears.
Issue 4 May 2009 69

Figure 27: Integrated Management Logon screen
5. Enter your S8300 initial entry username in the Logon ID box.

6. Click Logon. The password field appears.
7. Enter your password in the password field, and click Logon. The main menu for Avaya
Integrated Management appears.

Figure 28: Integrated Management Main Menu
8. From the Integrated Management main menu, select Launch Maintenance Web
Interface. The Maintenance Web Pages Notice page appears, with a navigation menu at
the left.
Issue 4 May 2009 71

Figure 29: Maintenance Web Pages Notice page
9. Leave the Maintenance Web Pages open to perform the tasks described in the coming
sections.
Changing the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance

Web Page
1. Select Configure Server from the left-hand menu on the Maintenance web page. The
Back Up Data page appears.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to back up the current data.
3. Click Continue.
4. Select Configure individual services.
5. Click Continue.
6. From the left navigation menu, click Set Modem Interface. The Set Modem Interface page
appears.
7. Enter the RAS IP address you obtained using the ART tool. See Running the Automatic
Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 24.

8. Click Change modem settings.

9. Click Continue.
10. Click Close Window.
Note:
Note: You can only change the modem settings on the Configure Server Maintenance
Web Pages if you have an Avaya Maintenance contract.

If your installation includes an S8300 Server module, you must connect the USB modem to the
S8300. After the G450 is configured, you can leave the modem permanently connected to
enable the S8300 to report alarms to remote locations.
Note:
Note: If you require a USB CD-ROM drive to download software upgrades, connect the
USB CD-ROM drive to the remaining available USB port on the S8300 module.
Connecting and enabling the modem

1. Connect the USB modem to a working telephone line.
2. Connect the modem to one of the USB ports on the S8300 module.
3. From the navigation menu of the Maintenance Web Pages, select Security > Modem.
The Modem page appears.
Figure 30: Modem page
4. Select Enable modem for unlimited incoming calls.

5. Click Submit.
Issue 4 May 2009 73

Testing the modem connection (G450 with S8300)

1. Setup a dialup connection on a remote PC with the following settings:
● Automatically detect settings.
● No Username, Password, or Domain.
● Security > Show Terminal Window.
2. Dial in to the modem from the remote PC.
3. When prompted, provide the rasaccess login and password in the Terminal Window.
4. Close the Terminal Window to complete the connection.
If a USB CD-ROM drive is required to download software

upgrades
Connect the USB CD-ROM drive to the remaining available USB port on the S8300 module.

Chapter 5: Configuring the G450
The G450 requires software configuration. The G450 can be configured using:
● The Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW). Avaya IW is a wizard that prompts you for all
configurations required to complete the installation of the G450. Avaya IW is used only to
configure a G450 with an S8300. Refer to Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation
Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 155.
● The Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW). The GIW is a wizard that prompts you for all
configurations required to complete the installation of the G450. You can run GIW to
configure a G450 without an S8300. Refer to Appendix D: Running the Gateway
Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 189.
● The Avaya G450 Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI is a comprehensive tool for
configuring the gateway and includes all supported configuration tasks. For information
about configuration using the CLI, see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway,
03-602055. For detailed information on CLI commands, refer to the Avaya G450 CLI
Reference, 03-602056.
The G450 can be accessed:
● At the customer site via a laptop connected to the Console port or Services port of the
G450. For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port, refer to Connecting
a computer to the Services port on page 48.
● From a remote location via a modem. For information about connecting and enabling a
modem, refer to Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on
page 63.
● Remotely through the network. For information about preparing the G450 for configuration
via the network, refer to Configuring basic gateway connectivity on page 75.
Configuring basic gateway connectivity

You can configure the G450 basic network parameters to achieve network connectivity without
running any CLI commands. A remote technician can then further configure the gateway as
required.
1. Prepare a laptop with SSH client software.
2. Set the laptop's TCP/IP properties as follows:
- IP address: 192.11.13.5
- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252
Issue 4 May 2009 75

Configuring the G450
- Disable DNS service

- Disable WINS Resolution
3. Disable the proxy server in the laptop’s Internet browser settings.
4. Connect the laptop computer to the G450 Services port, using an Ethernet cable.
5. SSH to 192.11.13.6.
6. At the prompt, enter username root and password root.
7. At the prompt, configure a new password.
8. At the prompt, enter y to configure basic gateway connectivity.
9. Configure the following parameters, or press Enter to accept the default value shown in
square brackets:
- VLAN number
- IP address and subnet mask for the primary management interface
- IP address for the default gateway (router)
- Up to four IP addresses to specify the Media Gateway Controllers
- Hostname for the G450
The settings you configured are displayed, and you are prompted for confirmation.
● If you confirm the settings, they are saved and the G450 reboots. A remote technician can
now further configure the gateway using the CLI.
● If you do not confirm the settings, you are prompted to re-configure them. If you enter y,
the parameters are presented again for configuration.

Chapter 6: After installation
After initial configuration, it is necessary to test the installation, and remove the installation
equipment.
Step 1: Testing the installation

When the installation is complete, simple tests must be performed to test telephone and data
connectivity.
Testing data connectivity

Test data connectivity by pinging the IP address of each device to test the device’s connectivity
within the network and outside the network.
Test local data connectivity on-site by checking that you can send an email between two PCs
that are connected to the G450.
Testing telephones
1. Make outgoing calls from the telephone. Make sure you hear a dial tone when you pick up
the receiver. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an
external (outside the local network) call.
2. Make a call to the telephone from both within the network and outside of the network.
Testing trunks
Use the facility test call feature to verify that each trunk is functioning properly.
For information about how to use the facility test call feature, see Maintenance Procedures for
Avaya Aura Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300432.
Issue 4 May 2009 77

After installation
LSP failover testing

If you have an S8300 Server module installed in the G450 and configured as an LSP, you need
to perform a test to make sure that the LSP takes over control of the G450 if the G450 becomes
disconnected from the primary MGC.
1. Verify that valid translations are file synchronized to the LSP by logging into Avaya Aura
Communication Manager from the LSP and listing either stations or trunks (refer to
Administrator’s Guide for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 555-233-506). Verify that
the list of stations or trunks is valid. If the files are not synchronized, verify that you have
correctly configured the required IP address(es) for the primary controller (MGC). If you
are using Avaya IW to configure the G450, the following are key actions that must be done
in the wizard to ensure correct IP address configuration:
a. In the Usage options screen, select Install this media server as an LSP. The Primary
Controller IP Address screen appears later in the wizard, and calls for the required
primary controller IP addresses for your primary controller type. Refer to Table 5 for
the IP addresses and controller information.
b. In the Primary Controller IP address screen, enter all the required IP addresses for the
primary controller type.
There may be a delay after running AIW until the LSP is registered with the primary
MGC and the translations are file synchronized.
2. If valid translations are not file synchronized to the LSP, do the following:
a. From a SAT session run from the primary controller, verify that the LSP node-name
and IP address are correctly entered.
b. Use the save translation lsp command to start the file synchronization process.
c. Log in again to Avaya Aura Communication Manager from the LSP and list either
stations or trunks.
d. Verify that the list of stations or trunks is valid.
3. Disconnect the G450 from the primary controller, ensuring that all telephones are still
connected to the G450.
4. Verify that calls can be made between local telephones and to outside telephones.

Step 2: Removing the installation equipment
Table 5: IP addresses and controllers
Primary media IP addresses to configure

gateway controller
S8300 The IP address of the primary S8300
S8400 The IP address of the S8400’s C-LAN or the IP address
of an Ethernet port on the S8400 configured for
processor Ethernet connections
S8710 The IP address of the S8710’s C-LAN and the IP
address of alternate C-LAN boards connected to the
S8710
S8720
S8730
Step 2: Removing the installation equipment

Remove all equipment that you used to assist you in the installation process. This may include
the CD-ROM drive, the software upgrade CDs, the laptop computer, and the modem (for
installations without an S8300 module only).
Note:
Note: If you have an S8300 Server module installed in the G450, leave the modem
connected to enable reporting of alarms to remote locations.
Issue 4 May 2009 79

After installation

Chapter 7: Adding media modules and
devices
When adding new devices to the G450, consult your project manager for topology requirements
for specific ports to be connected to specific devices.
Adding a media module

Various media modules including voice modules or WAN modules can be added to the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway.
Adding voice modules

You can hot-swap voice modules. This means that you can add or remove a voice module in the
Avaya G450 Media Gateway while the system is running, without any disruption to your
network. Configuration of the G450 is not necessary when you add or remove a voice module.
Configuration is only necessary when you add telephones, fax machines, and trunks to the new
module. See Adding a telephone on page 83 and Adding a trunk on page 84.
Some configuration of the Avaya Aura Communication Manager is necessary when you install
an MM710, MM720, or MM722 media module. See Administrator’s Guide for Avaya Aura
Communication Manager, 555-233-506. Also, for an MM710 or MM722, it is usually advisable to
set the media module as the synchronization source of the G450. For information about setting
the synchronization source of the G450, see Maintenance Commands for Avaya Aura
Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300431.
Adding WAN modules

You can hot-swap WAN modules. This means you can add or remove a WAN module in the
Avaya G450 Media Gateway while the system is running, but the G450 resets when you add or
remove the module. However, hot insertion and removal is not recommended in most cases.
Because hot insertion or removal resets the G450, any translation and other data that is in the
running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration will be lost.
Issue 4 May 2009 81

Adding media modules and devices
There is no configuration necessary when you add or remove a WAN module. Configuration is
only necessary when you add WAN lines to the new module. See Adding a WAN line on
page 85.
Adding a LAN device

You must connect, configure and test the LAN device before adding the device to the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway.
For instructions on connecting a new LAN device, see Connecting a switch or a network data
port on page 47.
Configuring the LAN device on the G450

Configuration may be performed on site by connecting a laptop computer to the Console port or
Services port of the G450, or remotely via a modem connected to the G450 or S8300.
For information about connecting a laptop to the Services port, refer to Connecting a computer
to the Services port on page 48. For information about preparing a modem, refer to
Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63. For information
about configuration, refer to Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 75.
Recording LAN information for software configuration

Before software configuration for the new LAN device takes place, gather the following
information:
● The name and location of the owner of or person responsible for the LAN device
● The slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the LAN device
connects. If the LAN device is connected to an IP telephone, note the extension of the
telephone to which the LAN device connects, and the slot and port number on the G450 to
which the telephone connects.
Testing the LAN device

After installation and configuration of the LAN device is complete, ping the IP address of the
device to test the device’s connectivity within the network and outside the network.

Adding a telephone
Adding a telephone
You must connect, configure and test the telephone before adding the telephone to the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway.
Connecting the telephone

To connect a new telephone, refer to the following sections:
● Connecting an IP telephone on page 48
● Connecting an analog telephone on page 50
● Connecting a DCP telephone to an MM712 or MM717 media module on page 52
Configuring the telephone on the G450

to the Services port on page 48. For information about preparing a modem, see
about configuration, see Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 on page 75.
Recording telephone information for software configuration

When you add a new telephone, note the following information for software configuration:
● Name and location of the owner of the telephone
● Model number of the telephone
● Extension of the telephone
● Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the telephone connects
Testing the telephone

1. Make outgoing calls from the telephone. Make sure you hear a dial tone when you pick up
the receiver. Make sure you can make both an internal (within the local network) and an
external (outside of the local network) call.
2. Make a call to the telephone from both within the network and outside of the network.
Issue 4 May 2009 83

Adding a trunk
You must order, connect, configure, and test the trunk before adding the trunk to the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway.
Ordering the trunk

● Make sure to install the trunk near the physical location of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway
● Make sure that the telephone service provider installs the trunk and verifies that the trunk
is working properly before you contact the technician that is performing or supervising the
configuration
● Note the telephone number of the trunk
Special considerations when ordering an analog trunk

When you order an analog trunk, there are several recommendations depending on your
system’s particular needs:
● For optimal functioning of the Emergency Transfer Relay feature, it is recommended to
use a loop-start trunk
● For voice mail systems in the United States, it is recommended to use a ground start trunk
to ensure that calls are properly disconnected when the outside caller disconnects
● For access to voice mail systems in the United States, it is recommended to use a ground
start trunk to ensure that calls are properly disconnected when the outside caller
disconnects. Ground start trunks may be provided via the MM711 media module.
● Request conditioned lines to ensure satisfactory voice quality and trunking interactions
Connecting the trunk

To connect a new trunk, see one of the following sections:
● Connecting an analog trunk on page 53
● Connecting an E1/T1 trunk on page 54
● Connecting an ISDN BRI trunk on page 54

Adding a WAN line
Configuring the trunk on the G450

Recording trunk information for software configuration

When you add a new trunk, note the following information for software configuration:
● Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the trunk connects
● Telephone number of the trunk
Testing the trunk

1. Make outgoing calls from the trunk. Ask the technician that is performing or supervising the
configuration for instructions how to access the trunk. Make sure you can make both an
internal (within the local network) and an external (outside of the local network) call.
2. Make a call into the G450 trunk.
Adding a WAN line

You must order, connect, configure and test the WAN line before adding the line to the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway.
Ordering the WAN line

If you need to order the WAN line, make sure that the service provider installs the line near the
physical location of the G450 and verifies that the line is working before you configure the WAN
on the G450.
Issue 4 May 2009 85

Connecting the WAN line

To connect a WAN line, see Step 3: Connecting to the Wide Area Network (WAN) on page 57.
Configuring the WAN line on the G450

Recording WAN information for software configuration

When you add a new WAN line, note the following information for software configuration:
● Slot and port number on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the WAN line connects
Testing the WAN link

After installation of the WAN line is complete, test the link by verifying that the SIG LED for the
port to which the link connects is lit. It is also recommended that you ping the IP address of a
device using the WAN line and perform a trace route test in order to test connectivity with the
network and outside the network.
Adding an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct

To install an Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct, follow the instructions in Step 5: Installing
the Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct on page 59.

Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing
Field Replaceable Units
You can add or remove VoIP modules, the fan tray, or a power supply unit. You can also add or
remove components of the upgrade memory kit. Refer to Equipment List on page 265 for
ordering information.
Note:
Note: There are two hardware versions of the G450, referred to as G450 1.x and
G450 2.x. 1.x and 2.x refer to the hardware suffix of the G450 which is printed on
the label displayed on the rear of the G450 chassis.
In cases where the instructions differ depending on the G450 version,

instructions are given for both versions.
Adding or removing G450 main board modules

You can add or remove VoIP modules in the G450 main board. To do so, you must pull out the
G450 main board. The G450 supports hot insertion and removal of the main board without
power drop. However, all services are suspended while the G450 main board is out, and all
calls passing through the gateway are disconnected. Any translation and other data that is in
the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration is lost.
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold the module only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not
touch the top or bottom of the circuit board. If possible, wear a wrist-strap and use
an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
Note:
Note: Consult your project manager before adding or removing VoIP modules in the
G450.
Issue 4 May 2009 87

Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units
Removing and inserting the G450 main board

1. To remove the G450 main board:
a. Unscrew the two captive screws, one at each side of the G450 main board front panel.
b. Open the latches on both sides of the main board.
c. Grasp the latches and pull out the main board from its slot.
d. Place the main board carefully on a table.
2. To insert the G450 main board:
a. Open the latches on both sides of the slot.
b. Insert the G450 main board vertically into the slot.
c. Push the main board in until the latches begin to close.
d. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel and then tighten the
latches.
e. Use the show platform mainboard CLI command to make sure the G450 is
working properly.
Figure 31: Removing and inserting the G450 main board
Adding or removing VoIP modules: MP20 and MP80

The G450 main board has four slots for VoIP engines. Each slot can accommodate either an
MP20 (Media Processor 20) module or an MP80 (Media Processor 80) module. An MP20
provides 20 channels, and an MP80 provides 80 channels. The G450 supports a maximum of
240 active channels. Therefore, the following number of active channels can be supported: 20,
40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200, or 240. Note that 220 channels cannot be supported.

ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold modules only by the edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not
an anti-static bag.
! CAUTION:
There is no configuration necessary when you install an MP20 or MP80 module.
1. To insert an MP20 or MP80 module:
a. Locate the MP20 or MP80 module slot. The location differs depending on the
hardware version of the G450 (see Figure 32 and Figure 33).
Figure 32: Location of MP20 and MP80 module slots in a G450 1.x
Figure notes:
1. MP20 or MP80 module slot 3. MP20 or MP80 module slot

Issue 4 May 2009 89

Figure 33: Location of MP20 and MP80 module slots in a G450 2.x
Figure notes:

b. Position the MP20 or MP80 module at a 45 degree angle to the main board, and start
inserting it into an MP20 or MP80 slot (see Figure 34 and Figure 35).

Figure 34: Adding or removing an MP20 or MP80 module in a G450 1.x
Issue 4 May 2009 91

Figure 35: Adding or removing an MP20 or MP80 module in a G450 2.x
c. Push the module in all the way. Do not use too much force.
d. Flatten the module so it is flush with the main board. The latches at both sides click
shut.
e. After powering up, use the show platform mainboard CLI command to make sure
everything is OK.
2. To remove an MP20 or MP80 module:
a. Open the latches on both sides of the module slot. The module lifts up.
b. Pull out the module. Touch the module only at the edges.
Replacing the fan tray

The fan system is field replaceable. It is mounted on a fan tray that can be replaced as one unit.

Replacing a power supply unit
The G450 supports hot swap of the fan tray. There is no need to power down or reset the G450
when replacing a faulty fan tray unit.
Prepare the new fan tray for insertion before removing the current the fan tray: take the new fan
tray out of its package and place it nearby.
! Important:
Important: Replace the fan tray within one minute, to avoid overheating the G450. If the
G450 exceeds its allowed heat level, it shuts down.
If you remove and replace the fan tray, do not remove it again before waiting at
least five minutes.
Figure 36: Replacing the fan tray
1. To remove the fan tray:

a. Unscrew the two captive screws on the front panel of the fan tray.
b. Grasp the screws and pull the fan tray out of its slot.
2. To insert the fan tray:
a. Insert the fan tray all the way into the slot.
b. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel.
The fans start operating immediately.
c. Wait one minute and then use the show platform fans CLI command to make
sure everything is OK.
Replacing a power supply unit

The G450 provides full redundant, load sharing power supply units (1 + 1). A single power
supply unit provides sufficient power for any G450 configuration. If you choose to install two
power supply units, they operate in a load sharing mode.
Issue 4 May 2009 93

The G450 supports hot swap of the power supply unit. Even if you have only one PSU unit
installed, there is no need to power down or reset the G450 when replacing a faulty power unit.
You can install the replacement PSU in the second PWR slot, and it will become the active PSU
once you remove the faulty PSU.
Figure 37: Replacing a power supply unit
1. To remove a power supply unit:

a. Disconnect the G450 power cable from the mains socket.
b. Disconnect the G450 power cable from the power connector, located on the front
panel of the power supply unit, at the rear of the G450.
c. Loosen the two captive screws, one on each side of the power supply unit.
d. Grasp the two side handles and pull the power supply unit out of its slot.
2. To insert a power supply unit:
a. Position the power supply unit before the opening and engage both sides of the unit in
the interior guides.
b. Slide the power supply unit slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to
assure that the unit does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides.
c. Close and tighten the two captive screws on the front panel.
d. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the power supply unit.
e. Plug the power cable into a mains socket.
f. After powering up, use the show platform power CLI command to make sure
everything is OK. The upper PSU is referred to as PSU #1 in the CLI, and the lower
PSU is PSU #2.

Installing the upgrade memory kit

The upgrade memory kit enables increasing the number of announcement files on the G450
from 256 to 1024, by storing them on a removable compact flash. This also increases the total
amount of announcement time from 45 minutes to four hours. Since the announcements are
played from RAM, you must also increase RAM. The upgrade memory kit therefore consists of:
● 1 GB compact flash memory card
● Two RAM cards. One is intended for use in a G450 1.x, and the other is intended for use in
a G450 2.x.
Inserting or replacing a RAM card in the G450

The G450 has two RAM slots. The basic configuration includes one 256 MB RAM card.
The slots are located on the G450 main board. You must pull out the main board to remove or
insert a memory card. The G450 supports hot insertion and removal of the main board without
power drop. However, all services are suspended while the G450 main board is out, and all
calls passing through the gateway are disconnected. Any translation and other data that is in
the running configuration but has not been saved to the startup configuration is lost.
To increase RAM memory in the gateway:
● In the G450 1.x, insert the 256 MB RAM card provided in the kit into the second RAM
slot.
● In the G450 2.x, remove the RAM card from the main board and replace it with the
512 MB RAM card provided in the kit.
These procedures include the following steps:
1. Removing the G450 main board. See Removing and inserting the G450 main board on
page 88.
2. Upgrading RAM memory:
● For a G450 1.x see Inserting a G450 1.x RAM card on page 96.
● For a G450 2.x see Replacing the G450 2.x RAM card on page 97.
3. Reinserting the G450 main board. See Removing and inserting the G450 main board on
page 88.
Issue 4 May 2009 95

Inserting a G450 1.x RAM card
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold the module only by its edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not
an anti-static bag.
1. Locate the empty RAM slot (see Figure 38).
2. Make sure the white latches at either side of the empty RAM slot are open outwards.
3. Insert the 256 MB RAM card provided in the kit into the RAM slot and push down, until the
two latches on either side of the card lock into place.
Figure 38: Inserting a RAM card in a G450 1.x

Note:
Note: To remove a RAM card, open the latches on both sides of the RAM slot housing
the RAM card. The RAM card lifts up. Pull out the RAM card.
Replacing the G450 2.x RAM card
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Hold the module only by its edges to avoid damage from static electricity. Do not
an anti-static bag.
1. Locate the RAM slot housing the RAM card (see Figure 39).
2. Open the latches on both sides of the RAM slot. The RAM card lifts up.
3. Pull out the 256 RAM card.
4. Insert the 512 RAM card provided in the kit into the RAM slot, and push in all the way. Do
not use too much force.
5. Flatten the RAM card so it is flush with the main board. The latches at both sides click shut.
Issue 4 May 2009 97

Figure 39: Replacing a RAM card in a G450 2.x
Inserting or removing a compact flash memory card

The G450 supports hot insertion and removal of a compact flash memory card without power
drop, provided the compact flash is not in use when you remove it.
Inserting a compact flash memory card

1. Remove the blank plate covering the compact flash memory card slot, located in the
center of the main board front panel.
2. Position the compact flash memory card so that the vendor name is facing up and the
connector is pointing toward the G450, and gently insert it into the compact flash slot.
3. After installing the compact flash memory card and the additional 256 MB RAM card, the
announcement files are not automatically moved from the internal flash to the compact
flash. To move them:
a. Make sure the gateway is registered to CM.

b. At the CM, set enable CF to y in the change media-gateway screen.

c. In the SAT interface of the CM, enter enable announcement-board.
d. The announcement files are copied from internal flash to the compact flash, and the
yellow CARD IN USE LED associated with the compact flash lights up.
4. Use the show platform mainboard G450 CLI command to verify that everything is
OK. In the command output, the lower RAM slot is referred to as Memory socket #1, and
the upper RAM slot is Memory socket #2.
● A G450 1.x with increased memory displays, for example:
MEMORY SOCKET #1
------------------
Type : 256MB DDR SDRAM memory module with ECC
Serial Number : 749f5c9f
Manufacture Part Num : 9VDDT3272AY-335G4
Faults : No Fault Messages
MEMORY SOCKET #2
------------------
Type : 256MB DDR SDRAM memory module with ECC
Serial Number : 749f5cb4
● A G450 2.x with increased memory displays, for example:

MEMORY SOCKET #1
------------------
Type : 512MB DDR SDRAM memory module
Serial Number : 0550749f
MEMORY SOCKET #2
------------------
Type : UNKNOWN
Serial Number : UNKNOWN
Manufacture Part Num : UNKNOWN
Faults : UNKNOWN
Removing a compact flash memory card

After installing a compact flash memory card, you may decide to remove it for one of several
reasons. The following sections provide instructions for safe removal of a compact flash
memory card in each possible scenario.
● Replacing a compact flash memory card with a different compact flash memory card
holding a different set of announcements
Issue 4 May 2009 99

● Replacing a compact flash memory card while retaining the current announcements.
You may wish to do this because the current compact flash memory card failed, or you
want to have two copies of the announcement files, or you want to use a faster
compact flash card.
● Downgrading from a compact flash to internal flash memory
Replacing a compact flash memory card with a different compact flash memory
card
1. At the SAT interface of the CM, enter disable announcement-board.
! Important:
Important: If you do not enter the SAT command disable announcement-board, then,
when you insert the new compact flash, its contents will be overwritten by the
contents of the old compact flash.
2. Make sure the yellow CARD IN USE LED associated with the compact flash is not
flashing.
! WARNING:
WARNING: If a compact flash is removed while it is in use, the announcement files on the
compact flash may become corrupted and the G450 may reset, causing all
announcement files in RAM to be lost.
3. Remove the compact flash memory card.
4. Insert the new compact flash memory card into the compact flash slot.
5. At the SAT interface of the CM, enter enable announcement-board.
Replacing a compact flash memory card while retaining the current

announcements
1. Make sure the yellow CARD IN USE LED associated with the compact flash is not flashing.
! WARNING:
WARNING: If a compact flash is removed while it is in use, the announcement files on the
compact flash may become corrupted and the G450 may reset, causing all
announcement files in RAM to be lost.
3. Insert the new compact flash memory card into the compact flash slot.
The announcement files of the old compact flash are written to the new compact flash.
Downgrading from a compact flash to internal flash memory

You can downgrade from using up to 1024 announcements on a compact flash to using up to
256 announcements on the internal flash.
! WARNING:
WARNING: The internal flash can only store up to 256 announcement files, totaling no more
than 45 minutes.
1. Backup the announcements from the compact flash to a USB device by entering the G450
command backup config usb usb-device backup-name
announcements-compact-flash.
Note:
Note: If you have only a few announcement files, you can use the G450 command
copy announcement-file usb to copy them one by one.
2. At the SAT interface of the CM, enter disable announcement-board, and then set
enable CF to n in the change media-gateway screen.
4. Optionally remove the second RAM card.
5. At the SAT interface of the CM, enter enable announcement-board.
6. Make sure there are no more than 256 announcement files in the backup. If the number of
announcement files exceeds 256, manually delete as many as necessary in the backup
directory.
7. Restore the announcements from the USB device to internal flash by entering the G450
command restore usb usb-device backup-name
announcements-internal-flash.
Note:
Note: If you copied the announcement files one by one, you can restore them one by
one using the G450 command copy ftp announcement-file.
8. Screw on the blank plate to cover the compact flash slot.
Issue 4 May 2009 101

Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Aura
Communication Manager
software
If your Avaya G450 Media Gateway includes an Avaya S8300 Server, it might be necessary to
upgrade the Avaya Aura Communication Manager software. Upgrading the software can be
performed in one of the following ways:
● Remote configuration via Telnet — upgrade the software remotely via Telnet. In this
scenario, a modem is required at the local site. Refer to Chapter 4: Connecting and
enabling a modem for remote access on page 63.
● Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway — upgrade the software at the site, using
a laptop computer and a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300 Media Gateway
● Remote configuration via network — upgrade the software remotely via a network
connection
Upgrading the software using a CD-ROM drive

The upgrade software is usually installed from a CD-ROM drive connected to the S8300. If the
upgrade is performed locally, you might need to provide a laptop and a USB CD-ROM drive. If
the upgrade is performed from a remote location, you must connect a USB CD-ROM drive to
the S8300 and insert the upgrade CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. You also might need to
connect a modem. This depends on the method used to perform the upgrade.
For a software upgrade on an Avaya G450 Media Gateway with an S8300 Server, use a USB
modem. See USB modems supported by the S8300 on page 154 for a list of USB modems
supported by the S8300.
Local configuration with S8300 Media Gateway

Upgrade the software at the site, using a laptop computer and a CD-ROM drive connected to
the S8300 Media Gateway.
1. Connect the modem to a working telephone line. Note the telephone number of the line to
which you connect the modem, so that you can provide the number to the technician who
is performing or supervising the configuration.

Upgrading the Avaya Aura Communication Manager software
2. Connect the USB modem to either of the two USB ports in the Avaya S8300 Server.
Note:
Note: You may be required to enable the modem and port. For instructions on enabling
the modem, see Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote
access on page 63.
3. Connect a USB CD-ROM drive to the free USB port on the Avaya S8300 Server. Then,
insert the CD-ROM provided by Avaya into the CD-ROM drive.
Upgrading the software without a CD-ROM drive

You can upgrade the Avaya Aura Communication Manager software without a CD-ROM drive
by downloading the upgrade software or installing it from a laptop computer.
Remote configuration
● Remote configuration via Telnet — upgrade the software remotely via Telnet. In this
scenario, a modem is required at the local site. See Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a
modem for remote access on page 63.
● Remote configuration via network — upgrade the software remotely via a network
connection
Performing the upgrade

You can upgrade the S8300 using the Software Update Manager or the Manage Software
option in the Maintenance web pages. For information about upgrading S8300 firmware using
the Software Upgrade Manager, see the Avaya Software Update Manager User Guide,
14-300168. For information about using the Maintenance web pages, refer to Accessing the
Maintenance web pages on page 69.
Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware
Software used to control the Avaya G450 Media Gateway itself and media modules installed on
the G450 is called firmware. You can upgrade the firmware on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway
and media modules using various different tools, each suitable for specific types of installation.
Note:
Note: The G450 firmware also includes the firmware for the MM340 and MM342 media
modules.
Upgrading G450 firmware using Avaya Software Update

Manager
You can use Avaya Software Update Manager to view your network inventory and the firmware
vintages of devices on your network. Avaya Software Update Manager can also check the
software versions currently in use against the latest versions available from Avaya and
recommend updates when a newer version is available. Based on this information, you can
download new firmware to multiple network devices simultaneously from a single management
station, ensuring all devices are updated.
You can use Avaya Software Update Manager to take a new release from Avaya's website and
store it on your hard disk for subsequent downloading to the appropriate devices.
Avaya Software Update Manager is a server application hosted on the Avaya Network
Management server. The server stores all the software retrieved from the Web and can
download the software to appropriate devices. You may also copy files containing embedded
software to the server. You can reach the server locally or via remote access, so you can update
the software on your devices from anywhere in the world.
Avaya Software Update Manager is part of the Integrated Management Enterprise Package
which is an entitlement for all Avaya Aura Communication Manager non-introductory offers.
For information about using Avaya Software Update Manager, see the Avaya Software Update
Manager User Guide, 14-300168.

Upgrading the G450 firmware
Upgrading G450 firmware from the primary controller

For a G450 without an S8300 or for a G450 with an S8300 installed as an LSP, you can upgrade
G450 firmware from the remotely located primary controller using the Upgrade Tool. The
primary controller may be an S8300, S85XX, or S87XX server. If the G450 includes an LSP, you
can also use the Upgrade Tool to upgrade the S8300 software on the LSP. For information
about using the Upgrade Tool, see Job Aid: Upgrade Tool and Worksheets, 555-245-757.
You can also refer to the guide for the primary controller for information about upgrading
firmware from the primary controller. See Upgrading, Migrating, and Converting Avaya Servers
and Gateways, 03-300412.
Upgrading G450 firmware using Gateway Installation

Wizard (GIW)
1. Prepare installation worksheets. See Preparing installation worksheets on page 109.
2. Download GIW from the Avaya Support website (support.avaya.com/avayagiw) to the
laptop computer. The laptop should be running Windows 2000 or Windows XP to support
GIW.
3. Set up a TFTP server on the G450 network. See Setting up a TFTP server on page 111.
The GIW runs the CLI commands on the G450 so the G450 can obtain the files from the
TFTP server.
4. Download the G450 firmware files to the TFTP server. See Downloading G450 firmware
files to a local TFTP server on page 111.
5. Run GIW to perform the upgrade. For instructions on performing the upgrade, see
Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 189.
Note:
Note: This upgrade must be done locally.
Note:
Note: You can only use GIW to upgrade firmware on a G450 that does not contain an
S8300.
Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Aura Communication Manager software using Avaya Installation
Upgrading G450 firmware and Avaya Aura Communication

Manager software using Avaya Installation Wizard (IW)
For a G450 with an S8300B installed, you can use Avaya IW to upgrade G450 firmware and
Avaya CM software. You can run Avaya IW from a remote location if the software is loaded
locally. You can point your browser to the IP address of the S8300B if you are in the customer
network or via the modem connection.
Note:
Note: During initial installation of a G450 you cannot use the Avaya IW to upgrade the
S8300. Use the Software Upgrade Manager instead (see the Avaya Software
Update Manager User Guide, 14-300168).
2. Place the upgrade software and firmware files on a laptop. These files are on the Avaya
Aura Communication Manager CD-ROM. To upgrade the S8300 Server software and
G450 firmware, insert the Communication Manager CD-ROM into a CD-ROM drive
connected to a laptop. Alternatively, you can upload the individual files to the hard drive of
the laptop. For more details, see Job Aid: Avaya Installation Wizard, 555-245-754.
Note:
Note: The CD-ROM may not contain the latest firmware. Check the Avaya Support
website for the latest firmware versions and compare these with the versions in
the directory. If the CD-ROM does not contain the latest versions, download the
latest versions from the Avaya Support website to the laptop.
3. Upgrade the S8300 Server using the Avaya IW. For more details, see Job Aid: Avaya
Installation Wizard, 555-245-754. This procedure also copies the G450 firmware as an
RPM (Red Hat Package Manager) file from the Communication Manager CD-ROM into
the /tftproot directory on the S8300.
4. Connect the laptop to the services port of the S8300 Server.
5. Access Avaya IW. See Accessing Avaya IW on page 155.
6. Run Avaya IW to perform the required upgrades:
● See Upgrading an existing MGC on page 159 for instructions for upgrading Avaya CM
software
● See Firmware configuration on page 171 for instructions for upgrading G450 firmware

Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via FTP/TFTP

You can upgrade firmware via FTP/TFTP using the CLI. You can perform the upgrade remotely
via a modem connection, but the upgrade files must first be downloaded to an FTP or TFTP
server on the LAN connected to the G450.
2. Set up an FTP or TFTP server on the LAN connected to the G450. For information about
setting up a TFTP server, see Setting up a TFTP server on page 111.
Note:
Note: If you use an FTP server, the G450 prompts you for a username and password
when you enter a command to transfer a file. Also, when opening an FTP
connection to the S8300, all anonymous FTP file transfers are restricted to the
/var/home/ftp/pub directory. Permission for anonymous FTP users to create files
in other directories is denied.
3. Download the firmware files to the FTP or TFTP server. See Downloading G450 firmware
files to a local TFTP server on page 111 or Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the
S8300 Server on page 112.
4. Connect to the G450 via modem or via the Console port on the front panel. For information
about connecting and enabling a modem for remote access, see Chapter 4: Connecting
and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63.
5. Run CLI commands. See CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP on
page 108.
CLI commands for upgrading G450 firmware via FTP/TFTP

You can use CLI commands to upload an upgrade file to the G450. For each of these
commands, include the full path of the file and the IP address of the FTP or TFTP host as
parameters. You must use the specific path to the file on the FTP or TFTP server according to
the home directory of the service (FTP or TFTP) that you are using. When you enter the
command, the CLI prompts you for a username and password.
● Use the copy ftp EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450
Manager software from an FTP server
● Use the copy ftp module command, followed by the module number of the module you
want to upgrade, to upgrade the firmware on a media module from an FTP server
● Use the copy ftp SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A
from an FTP server
● Use the copy ftp SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B
from an FTP server
● Use the copy tftp EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450
Manager software from a TFTP server
● Use the copy tftp module command, followed by the module number of the module
you want to upgrade, to upgrade the firmware on a media module from a TFTP server
● Use the copy tftp SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A
from a TFTP server
● Use the copy tftp SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B
from a TFTP server
Example upgrade via FTP/TFTP using the CLI

To upgrade the firmware of an MM712 media module in slot 3 from a TFTP server with the IP
address 192.1.1.10, where the home directory is c:\home\ftp\ and the upgrade file is located in
the directory c:\home\ftp\version, use the following command:
copy tftp module \version\mm712v51.fdl 192.1.1.10 3
Note:
Note: When uploading firmware from the S8300, use only the file name, without the
directory path, in the command line. Otherwise, the procedure will fail. For
instance, in the example above, you must use the following command:
copy tftp module mm712v51.fdl 192.1.1.10 3
Note:
The following example uploads a firmware version with the path and file name C:\g450.net from
an FTP server with the IP address 149.49.134.153 to Bank A of the G450:
copy ftp SW_imageA C:\g450.net 149.49.134.153
Preparing installation worksheets

Before you perform the upgrade, you must enter the names of the target software and firmware
versions that you need to install in the software and firmware upgrade worksheet. If you will
need to set up a TFTP server, you also need to plan the TFTP server IP address, login, and
password.

Entering values in Server Values worksheet

Enter software and firmware upgrade file names in the following table:
Table 6: Software and firmware upgrade file names
Items for Upgrading New file name for target
File for LSP and primary controller (not used with

Gateway Installation Wizard or for individual files)
G450 Processor
G450 Device Manager
MM710 E1/T1 media module
MM711 Analog Port/Trunk media module
MM712 DCP media module
MM714B Analog Port/Trunk media module
MM717 24-port DCP media module
MM720 BRI media module
MM722 BRI Trunk media module
Enter the TFTP server information in the following table:
Table 7: Global Settings for TFTP Server
TFTP Server IP TFTP Server

Address Directory
Setting up a TFTP server

To load individual firmware files on an Avaya G450 Media Gateway, you must place the files on
a PC connected to the customer’s LAN or on an S8300 Server in the customer’s network. Later,
you will log onto the G450 and use its TFTP capability to download the new firmware. If you can
use an S8300 Server to stage the firmware, see Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the
S8300 Server on page 112. If not, a TFTP server must be set up on the LAN.
Note:
Note: A Linux or Unix TFTP server should be used only if a Linux or Unix TFTP server
already exists on the local network. In this case, download the appropriate files to
your laptop and give it to the customer for proper placement and execution.
Downloading G450 firmware files to a local TFTP server

1. Access the www.avaya.com/support website.
2. Navigate to G450 Media Gateway downloads.
3. Locate the file names that match the files listed in your installation worksheet. See Table 8
for sample firmware file names.
4. Double-click the file name of the file you want to download. A File Download window
appears.
5. Select Save this file to disk.
6. Save the file to directory on the TFTP server on the local LAN that was created for this
purpose. See Setting up a TFTP server on page 111.
Note:
Note: If you are performing the upgrade using the G450’s Command Line Interface
(CLI) or the Upgrade Tool, you can place the upgrade files on an FTP server.
However, the GIW requires that the files be placed on a TFTP server.
Note:
Note: Use WinZip or another zip file tool to unzip the file, if necessary, before you copy
the file to the TFTP server.

Table 8: Sample Software and Firmware File names
Component File name Example
G450 Processors
G450 Processor g450_sw_21_11_0.bin
G450 Device Manager g450_emweb_1_0_7.bin
media modules
MM710 E1/T1 media module mm710v3.fdl
MM711 Analog Port/Trunk media module mm711v16.fdl
(version 6 or earlier)
MM711 Analog Port/Trunk media module mm711h7v21.fdl
(version 7)
MM711 Analog Port/Trunk media module mm711h20v54.fdl
(version 20 or later)
MM712 DCP media module mm712v14.fdl
MM714B Analog Port/Trunk media module mm714h10v93.fdl
MM717 DCP media module mm717v3.fdl
MM720 BRI media module mm720v1.fdl
MM722 BRI media module mm722v3.fdl
Installing firmware from the TFTP server on the S8300 Server

Instead of using a separately configured TFTP server on the LAN, you can use the TFTP server
capability of an S8300 Server to stage the firmware for upgrading the G450. To do this, you
must copy the individual firmware files to the /var/home/ftp/pub directory on the S8300 Server
using the Download Files web page on the S8300 Server. You must then copy the files to the
/tftpboot directory of the S8300 Server.
After copying the files to the /tftpboot directory, you can use the GIW or the Upgrade Tool to
install the files to the G450 or its media modules by specifying the S8300 Server’s IP address as
the TFTP server containing the new firmware files.
Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device
Note:
Note: You only have to do this if you have not upgraded the S8300 first or if you did
upgrade it first and found that the gateway files on the Communication Manager
CD were out of date. Otherwise, when you upgrade the S8300, the files appear in
the /tftpboot directory automatically.
Copying firmware files to the /tftpboot directory of an S8300 Server

1. Use Telnet, Avaya Site Administration, or another tool to access the S8300 Server
command line.
2. Log in as craft.
3. At the Linux prompt, type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press <Enter>. The Linux
prompt reappears. The current directory has changed to /var/home/ftp/pub.
4. At the Linux prompt, type mv <firmware_filename> /tftpboot, and press <Enter> to
move the firmware file to the /tftpboot directory. To move multiple firmware files (most
firmware files have an .fdl suffix), use the command mv *.fdl /tftpboot. The Linux
prompt reappears. The firmware file has been moved to the /tftpboot directory. If you copy
the firmware using the cp command, remove the files from the /var/home/ftp/pub directory
after you have copied them.
5. Repeat step 4, if necessary, for each firmware file you want to install.
6. At the Linux prompt, type cd /tftpboot. The Linux prompt reappears. The current
directory has changed to /tftpboot.
7. At the Linux prompt, type ls, and press <Enter>. A list of files in the directory appears.
8. Check the directory to make sure the firmware files you want to install are listed.
Upgrading G450 firmware using the CLI via a USB device

You can upgrade firmware via a USB mass storage device using the CLI. The upgrade files
must first be downloaded to a local PC.
2. Download the firmware files to a PC. See Downloading G450 firmware files to a local
PC on page 114.
3. Insert a USB mass storage device into the PC’s USB port, and copy the firmware files to
the USB mass storage device.
4. Remove the USB mass storage device from the PC, and insert it into a G450 USB port.
5. Run CLI commands to copy the firmware files from the USB mass storage device to the
G450. See CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device on page 114.

CLI Commands for upgrading G450 firmware via a USB device

You can use CLI commands to upload an upgrade file from a USB mass storage device to the
G450. You must use the specific path to the file on the USB mass storage device.
● Use the copy usb EW_archive command to upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450
Manager software from a USB mass storage device
● Use the copy usb module command, followed by the slot number of the module you
want to upgrade, to upgrade the firmware on a media module from a USB mass storage
device
● Use the copy usb SW_imageA command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A
from a USB mass storage device
● Use the copy usb SW_imageB command to upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B
from a USB mass storage device
Example upgrade using the CLI via a USB device

To upgrade the firmware of an MM712 media module in slot 3 from a USB mass storage device
where the upgrade file is located in the directory \temp\, use the following command:
copy usb module usb-device0 \temp\mm712v51.fdl 3
Downloading G450 firmware files to a local PC

1. Access the www.avaya.com/support website.
2. Navigate to G450 Media Gateway downloads.
3. Locate the file names that match the files listed in your installation worksheet. See Table 8
for sample firmware file names.
4. Double-click the file name of the file you want to download. A File Download window
appears.
5. Select Save this file to disk.
6. Save the file to a directory on the local PC.
Note:
Note: Use WinZip or another zip file tool to unzip the file, if necessary, before you copy
the file to the PC.
Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone
configuration and firmware
files
The Avaya G450 Media Gateway supports Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) downloading of
configuration files and firmware files for IP phones. TFTP can be used to download image files,
upgrade scripts, and settings files to IP phones. The local TFTP server stores the files and
supports requests to read files from the its outgoing directory for phone images and scripts.
You can use CLI procedures for downloading the files for IP phone upgrade from the G450
TFTP server.
Note:
Note: You can also upgrade IP phones using the S8300. For more details, refer to
http://support.avaya.com/elmodocs2/white_papers/
TFTP_HTTP_Download_External_060504.pdf
IP telephones supported by the local TFTP Server feature

● H.323:
● 4601
● 4601+
● 4602
● 4602SW
● 4602SW+
● 4606
● 4610SW
● 4612/24
● 4620
● 4620SW
● 4621SW
● 4622SW
● 4690

Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files
● SIP:
● SIP phone: 4602 SIP
● 4602SW
● 4602SW+
● 4610SW
● 4620SW
● 4621SW
IP telephones not supported by the local TFTP Server feature
● 4630
● 4630SW
Note:
Note: If you have an S8300 installed in the G450, you can alternatively upgrade IP
phones using the CM web pages.
Note:
Note: You can also upgrade IP phones using Avaya IW or GIW, as described in
Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) on page 155 and
Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on page 189.
Note:
Note: An alternative tool, the Avaya Software Update Manager (4.0 or higher), is a GUI
application that greatly simplifies the IP phone upgrade process, avoiding the
need to know the file names of the necessary upgrade files for each IP phone
type. For further information, see Avaya Software Update Manager User Guide,
14-300168.
Note:
Note: The IP address of the TFTP server is the PMI.
Administering the upgrade

When using supported IP phones with the G450, the IP phones require the downloading of the
settings file and the upgrade scripts. These files are stored in the script banks in NVRAM and
are preserved in the event of a reset or power failure. There are two script banks.
Administering the upgrade
In addition, each phone can have a booter application and a phone application. There are four
banks that can store up to two phone images (booter and phone application files) at any given
time. Since the image files are stored in RAM, a reset or power failure erases these files. The
image files are used only for upgrading the IP phone, so there is no need to store them
permanently. However, the scripts are used by the IP phones when they are reset, and are
therefore stored in NVRAM. You can upgrade up to two types of phones and then release the
banks for use with another IP phone type.
There are cases where the image files are the same for different IP phone types. In these
cases, you can download the image files once for the IP phones that use the same image. The
scripts are global to all the supported IP phone images.
You can download and then upload setting script files in order to update their content. It is not
recommended to change the upgrade script.
By default, the RAM allocation for TFTP server is 10 MB. You can increase the RAM allocation
for TFTP server to up to 11.264 MB at the expense of the Sniffer cache application. The
maximum RAM for both applications is 12 MB.
There are four image banks, supporting two IP phone images in RAM, provided the combined
file sizes do not exceed the RAM allocation for TFTP server. The maximum size for a booter
application or phone application file is 4.5 MB. Thus, it is possible that in some cases, the
allocation may only suffice for one complete IP phone image and not two.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: To activate a change in RAM allocation to the TFTP server, reset is required.
Upon reset, any phone image files stored in RAM are erased.
Note:
Note: Previous releases of TFTP server required the configuration of the DHCP server
option 43/176 with the named value pair TFTPDIR=/phonedir/ in order to allow
the IP phone to access the files in this directory. This configuration is still
supported but is no longer required.
Upgrading the IP telephone

IP phone upgrade files include script files, boot images files, and phone application image files.
You can download these files to a remote FTP/TFTP/SCP server, or you can download them to
a laptop and copy them to a USB device. You can then copy the upgrade files to the G450.
Note:
Note: An SCP server can be used for copying the script files, which do not exceed
128 KB, but cannot be used for copying image files.

Note:
Note: The G450 uses the SSH protocol to support the use of SCP for secure file
transfer. When using SCP, the G450 is the SCP client, and an SCP server must
be configured on the management station. For more information about
establishing an SCP session, see Administration for the Avaya G450 Media
Gateway, 03-602055.
1. Check the available memory size for the image files using the show
application-memory command. If the memory size needs to be changed, proceed to
step 2, otherwise proceed to step 6.
2. Set the memory size for the image files using the ip tftp-server file-system
size command.
3. Copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration using the copy
running-config startup-config command.
4. Reset the G450 using the reset command.
5. From the Avaya Support website, obtain the desired phone upgrade files (script files, boot
image files, phone application image files), using either of the following methods:
- Download the phone upgrade files to a remote FTP/TFTP/SCP server. Note that SCP
can be used to download script files but not image files.
- Download the upgrade files to a laptop and copy them to a USB mass storage device.
6. Copy the script files for the IP phone family.
- To copy from the remote FTP/SCP/TFTP server, use one of the following commands:
● copy scp phone-script
● copy ftp phone-script
● copy tftp phone-script
- To copy from the USB device, insert the USB device into a G450 USB port and copy
the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-script command.
7. Copy the boot image files for up to two IP phone types.
- To copy from the remote FTP/TFTP server, use either the copy ftp phone-image
command or the copy tftp phone-image command for each IP phone type.
the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-image command.
8. Copy the phone application image files for up to two IP phone types.
- To copy from the remote FTP/TFTP server, use either the copy ftp phone-image
command or the copy tftp phone-image command for each IP phone type.
the files to the resident TFTP server using the copy usb phone-image command.
9. Reset the phones and wait for the installation to be completed.
TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples
Note:
Note: Once the upgrade procedure is complete, you can delete the files using the
erase phone-image command.

In the following example, 4602SW and 4602D phones, which use the same image files, are
upgraded first. Later, 4620 phones are upgraded. The script files are not copied for the second
upgrade, since they are already stored in NVRAM.
Upgrading the 4602SW and 4602D phones

1. Check the available memory size for the image files using the show
application-memory command. If the memory size is smaller than the combined sizes
of the image files for the phones, proceed to step 2, otherwise proceed to step 5.
2. Set the memory size for the image files using the ip tftp-server file-system
size command. For example:
G450-001(super)# ip tftp-server file-system-size 18128

To change ip tftp-server file system size, copy the running configuration
to the start-up configuration file, and reset the device
G450-001(super)
3. Copy the running configuration to the start-up configuration using the copy
running-config startup-config command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy running-config startup-config

Beginning copy operation ................... Done!
4. Reset the G450 using the reset command. For example:
G450-001(super)# reset
This command will reset the device
*** Reset the device *** - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Resetting the device...
5. From the Avaya Support website, download the desired phone upgrade files (script files,
boot image files, phone application image files) to a remote FTP server at IP address
192.168.49.10.

6. Copy the script files for the 46xx IP phone family using the copy ftp phone-script
command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-scriptA 46xxupgrade.txt 192.168.49.10

Confirmation - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Username: root
Password:
Beginning download operation ...
This operation may take up to 20 seconds.

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.
For more information , use 'show download phone-script-file status'
command
G450-001(super)#
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-scriptB 46xxupgrade.txt 192.168.49.10
Confirmation - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y
Username: root
Password:

For more information , use 'show download phone-script-file status'
command
G450-001(super)#
7. Copy the boot image files for the Avaya 4602 IP telephone using the copy ftp
phone-image command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageA pub\4602dbte1_8.bin 192.168.49.10
Username: root
Password:
For more information , use 'show download phone-image-file status'
command
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageB pub\4602sbte1_8.bin 192.168.49.10
Username: root
Password:
command
8. Copy the phone application image files for the 4602 IP phone type DEF4602D using the
copy ftp phone-image command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageC pub\4602dape_8.bin 192.168.49.10
Username: root
Password:
command
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageD pub\4602sape_8.bin 192.168.49.10
Username: root
Password:
command
9. Reset the phones and wait for the installation to be completed.
Upgrading 4620 IP phones after the script files are already stored
in NVRAM
1. Copy the boot image files for the 4620 IP phone using the copy ftp phone-image
command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageA pub\bbla20_1817.bin 192.168.49.10
Username: root
Password:
command

2. Copy the phone application image files for the 4620 IP phone using the copy ftp
phone-image command. For example:
G450-001(super)# copy ftp phone-imageB pub\def20r1_8_1.bin 192.168.49.10
Username: root
Password:
command
Note:
Note: Once the upgrade procedure is complete, you can delete the files using the
erase phone-image command.
Failure scenarios and repair actions

There are various configuration related problems which will cause the upgrade to fail. The
scenarios can be repaired by readjusting the downloading or configuration settings.
Table 9: Failure scenarios and repair actions
Problem Possible cause Action
“Free Application Memory is You tried to configure more Re-adjust the allocation of
xxx MB. Use show memory than is available in the memory between the
application-memory for main bank. Sniffer cache application
more details” and the TFTP server. Be
sure the Sniffer allocation
is not needed for trouble
shooting.
“Application Memory You tried to download None. The memory
reached its limits. Sniffer and configuration files after allocations are set to the
TFTP server application configuring the total memory default values.
memory sizes restore to allocations for applications and
defaults” Sniffer to more than 12 Mb in
the startup configuration and
performing a reset.
Cannot download file to Refer to the specific error
Gateway message you receive.
1 of 2
Upgrading considerations
Table 9: Failure scenarios and repair actions (continued)
Problem Possible cause Action
"Not enough memory in The remote file is larger than Free more space in the
RAM" the available RAM. RAM using the erase
phone-script or
erase phone-image
command.
"Not enough memory in The remote file is larger than Free space in the NVRAM
NVRAM" the available NVRAM. using the erase
phone-script
command.
"File already Exists in other You tried to download the None. You cannot load
Bank" same file to more than one two files with the same file
bank. name to more than one
bank.
“TFTP - General failure” File name or path incorrect Check the file name and
path.
“Can't start upload operation. You are trying to upload a file Upload from a different
Wrong operation parameters from an empty bank. bank.
or other operation already in Download a file to the
progress, please try again” bank.
2 of 2
Upgrading considerations
● Configuration files, such as upgrade script and setting files, are copied to the phone
configuration banks in NVRAM, while phone images are stored in RAM
Note:
Note: Image files are cleared if you reset the gateway.
● Phone image banks are stored in the same TFTP directory. Therefore, you cannot copy
the same file name to more then one bank. Copying a file to a bank containing a file with
the same file name causes the old file to be overwritten by the new one.
● File names for IP phone image files and script files are limited to 32 characters

Chapter 12: Backing up and restoring the
G450
You can backup and restore the G450 to and from a USB mass storage device using a single
CLI command for backup and a single CLI command for restore. This is especially helpful for
efficient restoring or replicating of a G450 media gateway.
If the G450 is located remotely, you can backup and restore the G450 files one by one, using
TFTP/FTP/SCP servers.
For information about G450 backup and restore, see chapter 5 in Administration for the Avaya
G450 Media Gateway, 03-602055.

Backing up and restoring the G450
Chapter 13: Troubleshooting
You can have problems with phones, a trunk, the power, or the WAN line. It is necessary to
identify the specific problem to figure out how it can be resolved. In addition, you may have to
perform an NVRAM initialization if you are unable to access the CLI.
One telephone stops working

If one telephone in the network stops working, but the other telephones and data devices
continue to work normally, the problem is probably with the telephone itself. There could also be
a problem with the telephone’s connection to the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, or a power
management event, in which the power budget is exceeded and low priority ports are
disconnected.
Identifying the problem when one phone stops working

1. Replace the telephone. If the new telephone works, the problem is with the telephone
itself. If the new telephone does not work, go on to the next step.
2. Connect the telephone to a different power supply. If the telephone works, the problem is
with the original power supply. If the telephone still does not work, go on to the next step.
3. Connect the telephone to a different network port. If the telephone works, the problem is
with the original network port. If the telephone still does not work, go on to the next step.
4. Check the module on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to which the telephone is
connected. Check whether the physical connection is loose, and tighten the connection if
necessary. If the telephone still does not work, go on to the next step.
5. Check the LEDs on the module to which the telephone connects. Make sure the LED for
the port to which the telephone is connected is lit. If it is not lit, the problem may be with the
port or the module. If the ALM LED is lit, this is also an indication that there is a problem
with the port or the module. Note the port and module and contact your project manager.
For information on the various modules and their LEDs, see Appendix A: Front panel
description on page 133.

Troubleshooting
Several telephones stop working

If some telephones in the network stop working, but others continue to work, the problem could
be with a trunk or with one of the modules in the G450.
Identifying the problem when several phones stop working

1. Determine whether all the telephones that are affected connect to the same switch or port.
If they do, the problem is probably with that switch or port. If they do not, go on to the next
step.
2. Determine whether all the telephones that are affected connect to the same module. If
they do, check the LEDs on that module. If the ALM LED is lit, there may be a problem with
the module. Contact your project manager. If not, go on to the next step. For information
on the various modules and their LEDs, see Appendix A: Front panel description on
page 133.
3. Check the ALM LED on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis. If it is lit, there may be a
system-wide problem. Contact your project manager. For information on the chassis, see
Appendix A: Front panel description on page 133.
No power on the G450

1. Check the AC power source with a voltmeter.
2. Connect the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to a different AC power source. If the G450 has
power, the problem is with the original power source. If the G450 still does not work, go on
to the next step.
system-wide problem. Contact your project manager. See Appendix A: Front panel
A trunk stops working

1. Check the connection between the trunk and the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. If the
physical connection is loose, tighten the connection. If the trunk still does not work, go on
to the next step.
A WAN line stops working
2. Check the ALM LED on the module to which the trunk connects. If it is lit, see Maintenance
Alarms for Communication Manager 2.1, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300190 for
testing procedures.
A WAN line stops working

1. Check the connection between the WAN line and the Avaya G450 Media Gateway. If the
physical connection is loose, tighten the connection. If the line still does not work, go on to
the next step.
2. Check the ALM LED on the module to which the WAN line connects. If the ALM LED is lit,
the problem may be the configuration of the module or a lack of T1 signal. You can try the
following:
- For E1/T1 interfaces, use the show controllers command to view the status of the
interface’s controller. Make sure the controller is up, and that all error counters do not
increase.
- For all serial interfaces (E1/T1 and USB), use the show interfaces Serial
command to verify that the interface and line protocol are both up.
- For USB interfaces only, use the show interfaces Serial command to verify that
all line signals are up.
- Swap the module with another one.
- Check the CON LED on the module. The CON LED indicates if you have a signal. If
the CON LED is lit, check with your provider that you are receiving a signal.
For information on the various modules and their LEDs, see Appendix A: Front panel
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: Hot insertion of a WAN module resets the G450. Therefore, any translation and
other data that is in the running configuration but has not been saved to the
startup configuration will be lost.
system-wide problem.
CLI is not accessible

You can perform an NVRAM initialization using a jumper on the G450 main board. You should
only use this procedure if you are unable to access the CLI, for example if the G450 resets
continuously.

Troubleshooting
VOLTAGE ALERT:
VOLTAGE ALERT: Disconnect the G450 from the external power source before proceeding.
ELECTROSTATIC ALERT: Do not touch any components on the printed circuit board except when installing
or removing the bridge for the jumper pins.
1. Remove the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main
board on page 88.
2. Look for the hardware version number of the G450 on the label displayed on the rear of
the chassis and determine whether it is 1.x or 2.x. The two versions differ in the placement
of components on the main board.
3. Locate the NVRAM init jumper towards the front of the G450 main board.
- In a G450 1.x, the jumper is labeled J5 (refer to Figure 40).
- In a G450 2.x, the jumper is labeled NVRM_INIT (refer to Figure 41).
Figure 40: NVRAM INIT Jumper in G450 1.x
CLI is not accessible
Figure 41: NVRAM INIT Jumper in G450 2.x
4. Bridge the NVRAM INIT jumper:

- In a G450 1.x, use the bridge provided in the accessory kit to bridge jumper P5.
- In a G450 2.x, use the bridge provided in the accessory kit to bridge pins 2 and 3 of the
NVRM_INIT jumper. Pins 2 and 3 are closer to the backplane of the main board.
5. Insert the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main
board on page 88.
6. Let the G450 operate for about 5 minutes so that it will boot and erase the current
configuration.
7. Remove the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main
board on page 88.
8. Remove the bridge.
! Important:
Important: If you do not remove the bridge, the G450 will continue to initialize the NVRAM
when it resets or is powered up.
9. Insert the G450 main board as described in Removing and inserting the G450 main
board on page 88.

Troubleshooting
Appendix A: Front panel description
You can use the front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway to:
● Connect devices
● Add media modules
● View LEDs
● Reset the device
● Reset and recover from the alternate bank
The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis

without media modules
There are two hardware versions of the G450, referred to as G450 1.x and G450 2.x.
1.x and 2.x refer to the hardware suffix of the G450, which is printed on the label displayed on
the rear of the chassis. The differences between the two versions are minor, and include slightly
different front panels, and different placement of components on the main boards.
Figure 42: The G450 front panel ports and slots
Media module slots

The G450 has eight standard media module slots (V1 through V8).

Front panel description
For information about the different media modules that can be housed in the media module
slots, see Combination limitations on page 35 and Allocating slots on page 35.
System LEDs
Table 10: System LEDs
LED Name Color Indication
MDM Modem Detected Green A modem is connected to the

CONSOLE or USB port
ALM Alarm Red An alarm is present in the system, or
an enabled compact flash has been
removed
CPU CPU Green OFF — A test is in progress
ON — Normal operation
PWR Power Green OFF — No power
BLINKING — Problem with power
ON — Normal operation
USB ports
USB are standard USB ports, USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible. The USB ports support the
connection of:
● USB flash drive
● USB modem. See USB modems supported by the G450 on page 154 for a list of
supported USB modems.
Console port (Console)

The Console port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use the Console port to connect a console
device or modem to the G450.
The front panel of the Avaya G450 Media Gateway chassis without media modules
Services port (Services)

The Services port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use the Services port to connect a laptop
through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port to the G450 for configuration purposes.
Compact Flash Interface

The compact flash slot enables increasing the number of announcement files on the G450 from
256 to 1024, by storing them on a removable 1 GB compact flash memory card. Note however
that since the announcements are played from RAM, you must also increase RAM from 256 MB
to 512 MB. You can obtain an Avaya upgrade memory kit which includes both a compact flash
memory card and a RAM memory card. For instructions on installing and enabling the compact
flash memory card, see Job Aid: Installing the upgrade memory kit components in the Avaya
G450 and G430 Media Gateways, 03-603203.
The yellow CARD IN USE LED adjacent to the compact flash slot indicates the state of the
compact flash memory card.
Table 11: Compact Flash CARD IS USE LED states
LED State Meaning
CARD IN Steady yellow A compact flash card is inserted but not being
USE used. You can safely remove the card.
Flashing yellow A compact flash card is in use. Do not remove
the compact flash card while the LED is flashing.
Off A compact flash card is not inserted
Emergency Transfer Relay port (ETR)

The ETR port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use the ETR port to connect to up to two 808A
Emergency Transfer Panels. These panels provide basic telephone services in the event of
system failure.
When the Emergency Transfer Relay (ETR) feature is activated, the green ETR LED is lit.
For more information on Emergency Transfer Relay, refer to Step 6: Installing an 808A
Emergency Transfer Panel and associated telephones on page 60.
For information on installing the 808A Emergency Transfer Panel, see 808A Emergency
Transfer Panel Installation Instructions, which ships with the Emergency Transfer Panel.

Contact Closure port (CCA)

The Contact Closure port (CCA) is wired as an RJ-14 port, but uses an RJ-45 network jack. This
port is used to support the G450’s Contact Closure feature. The Contact Closure feature is a
controllable relay providing dry contacts for various applications.
The adjunct box provides two contact closures that can be operated in either a normally closed
or normally open state. The contact closures can control devices such as devices that
automatically lock or unlock doors or voice recording units. The CCA port can be configured so
that the connected devices can be controlled by an end device, such as a telephone. For
example, a user can unlock a door by keying a sequence into a telephone keypad. For more
information on Contact Closure, see Step 5: Installing the Avaya Partner Contact Closure
Adjunct on page 59.
Implement the Contact Closure feature

Connect an Avaya Partner System Contact Closure Adjunct™ box to the CCA port.
Router ports (ETH WAN)

Each ETH WAN port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use ETH WAN to connect a data device
to the internal router through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port. The G450 serves as a router for the
WAN.
Switch ports (ETH LAN)

Each ETH LAN port is a standard RJ-45 network port. Use ETH LAN to connect a data device to
the switch through a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port. You can connect an external LAN to ETH LAN.
Reset (RST) and Alternate Software Bank (ASB) buttons

RST is the reset button. ASB is the Alternate Software Bank button.
The Avaya G450 Media Gateway has two firmware banks:
● Bank A
● Bank B
The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server
Each firmware bank contains a version of the G450 firmware. These may be different versions.
The purpose of this feature is to provide software redundancy. If one of the versions becomes
corrupted, you can reset the G450 using the other version. This is particularly important when
uploading new versions.
By default, when you turn on or reset the G450, the G450 loads firmware from Bank B. This
default setting can be changed by the system administrator.
For example, if the G450 is configured to load firmware from Bank B, you can reset the G450 to
load the firmware from Bank A instead.
Load firmware from a bank other than the default bank during startup
1. Press and hold the reset button.
2. Press and hold the ASB button.
3. Release the reset button.
4. Release the ASB button.
The front panel of the Avaya S8300 Server

The S8300 Server is a Pentium-based processor that runs on a Linux operating system. The
S8300 runs Avaya Aura Communication Manager (CM) to provide call control services to the
G450 and other Avaya gateway devices.
The front panel of the S8300 includes:
● 10/100BaseT Fast Ethernet port (SERVICES)
● Two USB ports for modem connections or the USB CD-ROM drive (USB 1 and USB 2)
Figure 43: The S8300 Server

S8300 Server ports

The S8300’s 10/100BaseT Fast Ethernet port is labeled SERVICES, and is located in the center
of the front panel. The S8300’s two USB ports are labeled USB 1 and USB 2. They are located
towards the right of the front panel.
S8300 Server port LEDs
Table 12: S8300 LEDs
ALM Alarm Red An alarm is present

TST Test Green Avaya Aura Communication Manager is
running. When an S8300B is installed as an
LSP, the green light shows that the server is up
and waiting to provide service.
ACT Activity Yellow This LED is lit whenever a G450, a G700, an IP
telephone, or an IP console is registered with
the S8300. It is off when none of these IP
endpoints are registered with the S8300.
In addition, the front panel of the S8300 has a LED labeled OK TO REMOVE, which is
connected to a button labeled SHUT DOWN. This LED indicates that the S8300 has been shut
down, and can be removed from the G450 chassis. Do not attempt to remove the S8300 without
instructions from a specially trained technician.
The front panel of the Avaya MM340 media module

The MM340 media module provides one WAN access port for the connection of an E1 or T1
WAN line.
Figure 44: The MM340 media module front panel
MM340 ports
The MM340’s E1/T1 WAN access port is marked E1/T1. This port is located in the center of the
front panel.
MM340 LEDs
Table 13: MM340 LEDs
ALM Alarm Red The module type is not the type

configured in the MSG for the slot
TST Test Green A port is being initialized or a loopback is
present
ACT Activity Yellow At least one PPP/Frame Relay session is
active
SIG Signal Green The physical connection is up.


The MM342 media module provides one USP WAN access port and supports the following
WAN interface types:
● V.35/ RS449
● X.21
MM342 ports
The MM342 contains one WAN SCSI access port.
MM342 LEDs

TST Test Green A port is being initialized or a loopback
is present
ACT Activity Yellow At least one PPP/Frame Relay
session is active
CON Connection Green The physical connection is up

The MM710 T1/E1 media module terminates a T1 or E1 trunk. The MM710 has a built-in
Channel Service Unit (CSU), so an external CSU is not necessary. The CSU is only used for the
T1 circuit.
Note:
Note: For drop and insert, an external CSU is required.
Note:
Note: The six ports in the middle of the front panel are used for testing.
MM710 ports
The MM710 contains an E1/T1 port.
MM710 LEDs
ALM Alarm Red The module type is not the type configured in the
MSG for the slot
TST Test Green Either a test is being performed on the module via
the server, or the module is performing a self-test
upon initial insertion
1 of 2

Table 15: MM710 LEDs (continued)
ACT Activity Yellow An E1/T1 trunk device connected to the module is

in use.
The light is always on if the trunk is an ISDN E1 or
T1 PRI trunk, and the MM710 is not configured as
the synchronization source of the G450.
The light flashes at a rate of 2.8 seconds on and
0.2 seconds off if the MM710 synchronization
source is configured to synchronize the G450 and
the module is receiving a T1 source signal.
The light flashes at a rate of 0.2 seconds on and
2.8 seconds off if the MM710 synchronization
source is configured to synchronize the G450 and
the T1 source is lost.
SIG Signal Green The physical connection is up.
2 of 2

The MM711 media module provides analog line, trunk and telephone features and functionality.
The MM711 front panel includes eight universal analog ports. These ports can be used for
analog telephone or fax machines, or for analog trunks.
MM711 ports
The MM711’s eight universal analog ports are labeled 1 through 8.
MM711 LEDs
ALM Alarm Red The module type is not the type configured
in the MSG for the slot
TST Test Green Either a test is being performed on the
module via the server, or the module is
performing a self-test upon initial insertion
ACT Activity Yellow A device connected to the module is in use.
This can include a telephone that is off the
hook.

The MM712 DCP media module includes eight DCP telephone ports. The ports support
two-wire DCP telephones.
MM712 ports
The MM712’s eight DCP telephone ports are labeled 1 through 8.

MM712 LEDs
ALM Alarm Red The module type is not the type configured in
the MSG for the slot
ACT Activity Yellow A device connected to the module is in use.
This can include a telephone that is off the
hook.

The MM714 analog media module includes four analog telephone ports and four analog trunk
ports.
Note:
Note: The four analog trunk ports can not be used for analog DID trunks. Instead, the
four analog line ports must be used.
MM714 ports
The MM714’s four analog telephone ports are labeled 1 through 4. These ports can also be
used for DID trunks.
The MM714’s four analog trunk ports are labeled 5 through 8.
The front panel of the Avaya MM714B media module
MM714 LEDs

TST Test Green Either a test is being performed on
the module via the server, or the
module is performing a self-test upon
initial insertion
ACT Activity Yellow A device connected to the module is
in use. This can include a telephone
that is off the hook.
The front panel of the Avaya MM714B media module

The MM714B analog media module provides all the features provided by the MM714 (see The
front panel of the Avaya MM714 media module), and in addition provides an emergency transfer
relay. In the event of system failure, the MM714B provides emergency transfer relay (ETR)
services by connecting trunk port 5 and line port 4.
Figure 50: The MM714B media module front panel
MM714B ports
The MM714B’s four analog telephone ports are labeled 1 through 4. These ports can also be
used for DID trunks.
The MM714B’s four analog trunk ports are labeled 5 through 8.

MM714B LEDs
Table 19: MM714B LEDs

TST Test Green Either a test is being performed on
the module via the server, or the
module is performing a self-test upon
initial insertion
ACT Activity Yellow A device connected to the module is
in use. This can include a telephone
that is off the hook.
ETR ETR Green The Emergency Transfer Relay (ETR)
feature has been activated. This
feature provides an emergency link
between the telephone connected to
the line port 4 and the trunk
connected to trunk port 5 if power is
disconnected from the G450 or if the
G450 becomes unregistered from its
Media Gateway Controller (MGC).

The MM716 media module front panel has a 25-pair amphenol connector supporting 24 analog
line ports. These ports can be configured as DID trunks with either wink start or immediate start.
The MM716 is compatible with Avaya CM version 2.0 and higher, and G450 firmware version
25.0.0 and higher.
MM716 ports
The MM716 contains a single 25-pair amphenol connector, which can be connected by an
amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as
needed. You can attach up to 24 devices (analog telephones, trunks, modems, or fax machines)
to these jacks.
Table 20: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout
Station port Cable pair
1 White Blue
2 White Orange
3 White Green
4 White Brown
5 White Slate
6 Red Blue
7 Red Orange
8 Red Green
9 Red Brown
10 Red Slate
11 Black Blue
12 Black Orange
13 Black Green
14 Black Brown
15 Black Slate
16 Yellow Blue
17 Yellow Orange
18 Yellow Green
19 Yellow Brown
20 Yellow Slate
1 of 2

Table 20: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout (continued)
21 Violet Blue
22 Violet Orange
23 Violet Green
24 Violet Brown
OPEN Violet Slate
2 of 2
MM716 LEDs

performing a self-test upon initial
insertion
ACT Activity Yellow A device connected to the module is in
use. This can include a telephone that is
off the hook.

The MM717 high density DCP media module front panel has a 25-pair amphenol connector
supporting 24 Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) ports. To use the MM717 media module,
connect an amphenol cable to the port and to either a breakout box or a punch down block
containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as needed. You can attach up to 24 two-wire DCP telephones
to these jacks. The MM717 does not support four-wire DCP telephones.
MM717 ports
The MM717 contains a single 25-pair amphenol connector, which can be connected by an
amphenol cable to a breakout box or punch down block containing RJ-45 or RJ-11 jacks, as
needed.
Table 22: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout
1 White Blue
2 White Orange
3 White Green
4 White Brown
5 White Slate
6 Red Blue
7 Red Orange
8 Red Green
9 Red Brown
10 Red Slate
11 Black Blue
12 Black Orange
13 Black Green
14 Black Brown
15 Black Slate
16 Yellow Blue
1 of 2

Table 22: 25-pair amphenol connector pinout (continued)
17 Yellow Orange
18 Yellow Green
19 Yellow Brown
20 Yellow Slate
21 Violet Blue
22 Violet Orange
23 Violet Green
24 Violet Brown
OPEN Violet Slate
2 of 2
MM717 LEDs
ALM Alarm Red The module type is not the type configured in
the MSG for the slot
ACT Activity Yellow A device connected to the module is in use

The MM720 ISDN BRI media module contains eight 4-wire S/T ISDN BRI ports. These ports
interface to the central office at the ISDN T reference point.
MM720 ports
The MM720’s eight ISDN BRI ports are labeled 1 through 8.
MM720 LEDs

performing a self-test upon initial
insertion
ACT Activity Yellow A trunk connected to the module is in
use. In CM 3.0 or higher, the LED could
alternatively indicate that a telephone
connected to the module is in use.


The MM722 ISDN BRI media module provides two 4-wire S/T ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface)
2B+D access ports with RJ-45 jacks.
MM722 ports
The MM722 contains two ISDN BRI ports.
MM722 LEDs

ACT Activity Yellow A trunk connected to the module is in use.
In CM 3.0 or higher, the LED could
alternatively indicate that a telephone
connected to the module is in use.
Appendix B: Technical specifications
This appendix provides technical specifications for the G450, for compatible power cords, and
for USB modem support.
G450 Media Gateway specifications

The following table provides detailed information on the physical dimensions and tolerances of
the G450 Media Gateway.
Table 26: G450 Media Gateway specifications
Description Value
Height 5.25 in (133.3 mm)

Width 19 in (482.6 mm)
Depth 18 in (456 mm)
Weight of empty chassis 7.4 kg (16.5 pounds)
with blank plates - 9.5 kg (21 pounds)
Weight of chassis with basic 14 Kg (31 pounds)
configuration, including main
board, power supply unit, fan
tray, one DSP, and blank
panels on the media module
slots
Ambient working temperature 0-40°C
Operation altitude up to 10000 ft (3048 m)
Front clearance 12 in (30 cm)
Rear clearance 18 in (45 cm)
Relative humidity 10-90%, non-condensing
BTU 1,780 BTU/h
Max current 6A

Technical specifications
Power cord specifications

Following are specifications for power cords suitable for use with the G450.
For North America: The cordset must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, 16 AWG, 3-conductor (3rd
wire ground), type SJT. One end is to be terminated to an IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector
rated 10A, 250V. The other end is to be terminated to either a NEMA 5-15P attachment plug for
nominal 125V applications or a NEMA 6-15P attachment plug for nominal 250V applications.
For Outside North America: The cord must be VDE Certified or Harmonized (HAR), rated
250V, 3-conductor (3rd wire ground), 1.0 mm2 minimum conductor size. The cord is to be
terminated at one end to a VDE Certified/CE Marked IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector
rated 10A, 250V and the other end to a 3-conductor grounding type attachment plug rated at a
minimum of 10A, 250V and a configuration specific for the region/country in which it will be
used. The attachment plug must bear the safety agency certifications mark(s) for the region/
country of installation.
USB modems supported by the G450

● USRobotics USB modem, model 5637
● Multitech USB modem, model MT5634ZBA-USB-V92
USB modems supported by the S8300

● USRobotics USB modem, model 5637
● Multitech USB modem, model MT5634ZBA-USB-V92
● Multitech USB modem, model MT9234-ZBA
Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation
Wizard (Avaya IW)
The Avaya IW is a web-based installation wizard that is used with the Avaya G450 Media
Gateway to perform initial configuration tasks and to upgrade software and firmware. The Avaya
IW is designed for use with systems that contain an S8300 Server, operating in either ICC or
LSP mode. You can use Avaya IW to configure the Avaya G450 Media Gateway or to upgrade
an installed S8300 with new Avaya Aura Communication Manager (CM) software and/or G450
firmware. If you have an EPW (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet
(EPW) on page 25), you will be able to upload configuration parameters from the EPW to AIW
as part of your AIW session.
Accessing Avaya IW
1. Connect a laptop computer to the Services port of the S8300, using a crossover cable.
2. Make sure the laptop is configured as follows:
● IP Address: 192.11.13.5
● NetMask: 255.255.255.252
● Disable DNS
● Clear the primary WINS and secondary WINS IP Addresses
● Disable the Proxy Server in the Internet Explorer
3. Launch Internet Explorer on the laptop and type the following URL to access the S8300
Server Home Page: http://192.11.13.6.
The welcome screen for Avaya Integrated Management appears.
4. Click Continue. The Logon screen for Integrated Management appears.
5. Enter the appropriate login name and password.
6. Ask a customer representative for a login name and password that the customer would like
for the superuser login. If you are a business partner, you can also repeat this procedure to
add the dadmin login.
Note:
Note: Make sure the customer can change this login, its password, or its permissions
later.

Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW)
7. From the Integrated Management main menu, select Launch Maintenance Web Interface.
8. From the navigation menu of the Maintenance Web Pages, select Security >
Administrator Accounts.
The Administrator Accounts screen appears.
9. Select Add Login.
10. Select Privileged Administrator and click Submit.
The Administrator Logins -- Add Login: Privileged Administrator screen appears.
11. Type a login name for the account in the Login name field.
12. Verify the following:
● susers appears in the Primary group field.
● prof18 appears in the Additional groups (profile) field. prof18 is the code for the
customer superuser.
● /bin/bash appears in the Linux shell field.
● /var/home/login name appears in the Home directory field, where login name is the
name you entered in step 11.
13. Skip the fields Lock this account and Date on which account is disabled-blank to
ignore.
14. For the Select type of authentication option, select password.
Note:
Note: Do not lock the account or set the password to be disabled.
15. Enter the password in the Enter password or key field and the Re-enter password or
key field.
16. In the section Force password/key change on next login select no.
17. Click Submit.
The system informs you the login is added successfully.
18. Select the Launch Installation Wizard link from the home page.
The Overview screen appears:
Preliminary screens
1. Access the Avaya IW. The first screen that appears is the Overview screen.
2. Click Continue. The Avaya IW performs system auto-discovery and displays the results
on the Auto Discovery Results screen.
MGC configuration and upgrade options
3. Click Continue. The Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen appears. This screen
enables you to import system data from the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW). If
you import an EPW, some of the fields on the subsequent screens will be filled
automatically. For information about obtaining the EPW, see Obtaining the Electronic
Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 25.
MGC configuration and upgrade options

● Install this media server as a Main Server. This option configures the installed S8300
Server as the primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC). The primary MGC is the MGC
that the G450 searches for first to provide call processing services to the G450.
● Install this media server as an LSP. This option configures the installed S8300 Server as
a backup MGC (LSP) and to configure an external server as the primary MGC. In this
case, the installed S8300 will provide backup call processing services to the G450 in case
of connection failure to the primary MGC.
● Upgrade a previously installed media server with new software and/or media
gateway firmware. This option upgrades an installed server with new Avaya Aura
Communication Manager software and/or Media Gateway firmware.

Configuring and upgrading the server

1. Click Continue from the Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen. The Usage Options
screen appears.
Figure 55: The Usage Options screen
2. Specify which configuration processes you would like to initiate:

● Install this media server as a Main Server
● Install this media server as an LSP
● Upgrade a previously installed media server with new software and/or media
gateway firmware
3. Click Continue. If you are configuring a new MGC, the Confirm New Installation screen
appears. If you are upgrading an existing MGC, the Avaya Aura Communication Manager
Software screen appears. See Upgrading an existing MGC on page 159.
4. Click Continue. The Checklist screen appears displaying a list of required and optional
items you need to configure the G450. For details, see Chapter 1: Before you install on
page 21.
5. Click Continue. The NVRAM INIT screen appears. Restore all factory default settings if
necessary by clicking NVRAM INIT and selecting OK in the confirmation box.
6. Click Continue. The Date/Time screen appears. Reset the G450’s date and time if
necessary.
Upgrading an existing MGC
7. Click Continue. The Product ID screen appears. If you are configuring a new G450, enter
the product ID in the ID field and select Assign a new Product ID.
Upgrading an existing MGC

1. Click Continue from the Product ID screen. The Avaya Aura Communication Manager
Software Upgrade screen appears.
Note:
Note: You cannot use the Avaya IW to upgrade Communication Manager software.
Instead, use the Software Update Manager (see the Avaya Software Update
Manager User Guide, 14-300168), or use the Manage Software option in the
Maintenance web pages (refer to Accessing the Maintenance web pages on
page 69).
2. Click Continue. The SES Co-Res screen appears.
This screen enables you to enable or disable a SES Co-Res server. If you want to enable
or disable a SES Co-Res server, click the ENABLE SES button. A confirmation box
appears. Click OK. The SES Co-Res server is enabled or disabled and the SES Co-Res
screen appears.
3. Click Continue. The Software Update screen appears.
This screen enables you to unpack Avaya Aura Communication Manager updates.
4. If you want to unpack an Avaya Aura Communication Manager update, check Unpack
Update and browse to locate the update file on the laptop.
5. Click Continue. The Phone Message Files screen appears. Use this screen to install
standard and custom phone message files that provide messages for display sets that are
in the desired language format.

Figure 56: The Phone Message Files screen
6. Click Continue. The Media Server - IP Addresses screen appears. If your S8300 Server is
already configured, the Avaya IW should detect and display its address information in this
screen. If not, you must enter the required information.
Configuring the primary controller IP addresses
Figure 57: The Media Server - IP Addresses screen

1. Click Continue from the Media Server - IP Addresses screen. If you selected the Install
this media server as an LSP option in the Usage Options screen, the LSP Controller
screen appears. The IP addresses required vary depending on the type of primary
controller. Enter the required IP address(es) for the primary controller.

Figure 58: The LSP Controller screen
2. Click Continue. From the Optional Services screen, select the services you want.
Figure 59: The Optional Services screen
3. Click Continue. If you selected Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) in the Optional
Services screen, the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) screen appears. Enter the
required information.
Figure 60: The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) screen
4. Click Continue. If you selected Domain Name Service (DNS) in the Optional Services
screen, the Domain Name Server (DNS) screen appears. Enter the required information.

Figure 61: The Domain Name Server (DNS) screen
5. Click Continue. If you selected Network Time Protocol (NTP) in the Optional Services
screen, the Network Time Protocol (NTP) screen appears. Select an NTP option.
Figure 62: The Network Time Protocol (NTP) screen
6. Click Continue. If you selected Remote Access/INADS Support in the Optional Services
screen, the INADS screen appears. Enter a dialup IP address for Installation and
Administration System (INADS) remote support. For instructions on how to obtain the
INADS IP address, see Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP
address on page 24.
7. Click Continue. The Translation Source screen appears. Use the screen to generate
Avaya Aura Communication Manager translation information, including translations for
administration of extension ranges, trunk types, routes, class of service, feature access
codes, trunk access codes, station button assignment, and several other parameters.
Figure 63: The Translation Source screen
8. Click Continue. The Security Files screen appears if there is a resident server on the
gateway.
This screen displays the installed status of the license file and enables you to install or
replace the file from the laptop or LAN source. Without a valid license file, you cannot
access the Avaya Aura Communication Manager. For information on this file, see
Downloading CM license and authentication files to your laptop on page 23.
Note:
Note: If you selected Use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation
Source screen (Figure 63), the Security Files screen displays also the installed
status of the CM’s authentication file and enables you to install or replace the
authentication file from the laptop or LAN source.

9. If you want to install or replace the license file from the laptop or LAN source, check Install
New License file. Enter the full path of the file to install or use the Browse button to locate
the file.
Gateway configuration
1. Click Continue from the Security Files screen. The IP Addresses screen appears.
This screen displays the G450’s ID, as well as the type of media module residing in each
slot of the G450’s chassis.
2. Click the wrench icon corresponding to the G450 in the Action column.
The PMI configuration screen appears. The IP address and subnet mask of the PMI
should appear in this screen. Change this IP address and subnet mask in accordance with
your system specifications.
The Primary Management Interface (PMI) address is the interface used for the following
management functions:
- Registration of the G450 to an MGC
- Sending SNMP traps
- Opening Telnet sessions from the G450
- Sending messages from the G450 using FTP and TFTP protocol
Note:
Note: You can assign any IP interface that the MGC recognizes to be the PMI.
Figure 64: PMI Configuration screen

3. Click Continue. The SNMP V1 Community Strings screen appears. In the Read Only
Community String field, specify a name for the SNMP read community access name to
assign to the G450. In the Read Write Community String field, specify a name for the
SNMP write community access name to assign to the G450. Re-enter the strings in the
Re-enter Community String fields for confirmation. For information about SNMP, see
Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway, 03-602055.
Figure 65: The SNMP V1 Community Strings screen
4. Click Continue. The SNMP V3 screen appears.

Figure 66: The SNMP V3 screen
5. Complete all fields if you want to configure an SNMP V3 user. Otherwise, leave all fields
blank.
6. Click Continue. The Media Gateway Controller Information screen appears.
Configure the list of Media Gateway Controllers (MGCs) that will provide call processing
services for the G450. You must specify a primary MGC in the first IP address box. You
can specify up to three backup MGCs in the optional IP address boxes, in the order of their
priority. Specify your primary MGC in accordance with the usage option you chose (see
step 1). If you do not configure the S8300 installed in the G450 as the primary MGC,
configure the S8300 as a backup MGC.
Note:
Note: The G450 searches for the primary MGC first. If it cannot connect to the primary
MGC, it searches for a backup MGC. An MGC may be the Avaya S8300 Server
installed in the G450 or an external Avaya S85XX Server or Avaya S87XX
Server, or an Avaya S8300 Server installed in an external media gateway.
Note:
Note: To register an S85X or S87XX Server as the MGC, use the IP address of the
server’s Control-LAN card (CLAN) rather than the IP address of the server itself.
Firmware configuration
Figure 67: The Media Gateway Controller Information screen
1. To upgrade the G450 firmware, click Continue from the Media Gateway Controller
Information screen.
The Firmware screen appears. This screen displays the currently installed firmware
versions on the G450 and its media modules, as well as the most recent available
versions.
● To upgrade firmware, select the modules you want to upgrade and click Continue.
● To upload a new firmware version from a laptop, click Upload New Firmware. The
Firmware File Upload screen appears.
● To proceed without upgrading any firmware, clear all the boxes in the Select column
and click Continue.
2. The Firmware File Upload screen enables you to upload a new firmware file from a laptop.
Enter the file path of the file you want to upload, or use the Browse button to locate the
file.
3. Click Continue. The file is uploaded and the Firmware screen returns. Clear all the
checkboxes in the Select column.

4. Click Continue. The Change Master Key - Optional screen appears. The master key is
used to encrypt gateway secrets (passwords, etc.) in the gateway configuration file.
5. If you want to change the master key, enter the new master key passphrase in the Enter
Master Key field and then confirm by entering it again in the Confirm Master Key field. A
new master key is generated from the passphrase.
6. Click Continue. The Gateway Authentication screen appears.
Figure 68: The Gateway Authentication screen
7. If you have a service contract, the G450 is shipped with an authentication file. This
authentication file is required for Avaya services personnel to allow them secure remote
access to the gateway.
8. Click Continue. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen appears. View the status
of the Field Replaceable Units detected in the G450.
9. Click Continue. The TFTP Server screen appears.
Figure 69: The TFTP Server screen
10. If you want to upload configuration and firmware files for IP phones to the G450 TFTP
Server, do the following:
a. In the Server IP Address field, enter the IP address of the machine hosting the files
that are to be uploaded.
b. Select the file transfer protocol (TFTP, FTP, or SCP) you want to use to upload the files
from the host machine. TFTP is selected by default.
c. The use of the SCP protocol is limited to copying files of 1 MB or less. Therefore, an
SCP server can be used for copying the script files, which do not exceed 128 KB, but
cannot be used for copying image files.
d. If you selected FTP or SCP, enter the username and password in the Username and
Password fields, and re-enter the password for confirmation in the Re-enter Password
field.
11. In the Select column, check any files you wish to upload. If you selected SCP as your
upload protocol, the checkboxes for the phone images are disabled. If a green circled
checkmark is displayed in the Uploaded column, the file has already been uploaded.

Modem configuration
1. To configure the G450 for modem use, click Continue on the TFTP Server screen.
The G450 Modem Type Selection screen appears. Select the modem type you want to
use. For more information on using a modem with the G450, see Chapter 4: Connecting
and enabling a modem for remote access on page 63.
2. Click Continue. If you selected Serial Modem, the G450 Serial Modem Configuration
screen appears. If you selected USB Modem, the G450 USB Modem Configuration
screen appears. If you selected None, the Country screen appears. See Telephony
configuration on page 175.
3. If you selected Serial Modem, enter the required information in the G450 Serial Modem
Configuration screen, then click Continue.
Figure 70: The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen
4. If you selected USB Modem, enter the required information in the G450 USB Modem
Configuration screen, then click Continue.
Figure 71: The G450 USB Modem Configuration screen
Telephony configuration
If you selected the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation
Source screen (see step 7), the Telephony, Trunking, and Endpoints sections appear in the
wizard. If you did not select the option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the
Translation Source screen, skip to Alarm configuration on page 185.
1. To configure the G450’s telephony parameters, click Continue in the applicable modem
configuration screen. The Country screen appears. Select the country in which the
installation is taking place.
2. Click Continue. The Import Custom Template screen appears. This screen enables you to
configure telephony translation defaults for the Avaya IW.

Figure 72: The Import Custom Template screen
3. Click Continue. The Call Routing screen appears. Enter the required call routing
information.
Figure 73: The Call Routing screen
4. Click Continue. The Extension Ranges screen appears. To add a range, click Add
Extension Range and enter the starting and ending extensions for the range. If you want
this range to be used to route calls over an IP trunk, select Private Networking. To add
additional extension ranges, repeat these steps. When you are finished, click Continue.
Figure 74: The Extension Ranges screen
5. Click Continue. The Import Name/Number List screen appears. This screen enables you
to import an Excel file that contains user names, extension numbers, and other
information. To import this file:
a. Select Import the following name and number list.
b. Enter the file path of the file you want to import, or use the Browse button to locate the
file.
c. Click Continue.
Trunk configuration
The Trunking section appears in the wizard only if you selected the option to use this wizard to
create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7). If you did not select the
option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen, skip to
Alarm configuration on page 185.

1. To configure the G450’s trunk parameters, click Continue from the Import Name/Number
List screen. The Cross-Connects screen appears. If your trunk cross-connects have been
completed, click Continue to proceed with trunk configuration. If your trunk
cross-connects have not been completed, it is strongly recommended to exit the Avaya IW
and complete all cross-connects before proceeding with trunk configuration.
2. Click Continue. The IP Trunk List screen appears. This screen displays all IP trunks
configured on the G450. To refresh this list, click Refresh.
3. From the IP Trunk List screen you can perform actions including: adding a trunk, modifying
trunk parameters, modifying IP route configuration, displaying trunk status, and removing a
trunk.
To proceed to the CO Trunk List screen for configuring a trunk media module, click
Continue.
Adding a trunk
1. To add a new trunk click Add IP Trunk from the IP Trunk List screen. The IP Trunk
Configuration (new) screen appears.
Figure 75: The IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen
2. Enter the required information in the IP Trunk Configuration (new) screen and click
Continue. The IP Trunk List appears, with the new trunk included in the list of trunks. To
add an additional trunk, click Add IP Trunk and repeat this step. When you are finished
adding trunks, click Continue or select an action from the Actions column to modify an
existing trunk.

Modifying trunk parameters

1. To modify the trunk’s parameters, click the configuration icon in the Actions column of the
IP Trunk List screen.
Figure 76: The configuration icon in the Actions column
The IP Trunk Configuration (<trunk name>) screen appears, with the trunk’s current
parameters displayed.
2. Modify the trunk parameters and click Continue. The IP Trunk List appears. Select an
additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk
List screen. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 184.
Modifying IP route configuration

1. To modify the trunk’s IP route configuration, click the IP route icon in the Actions column
of the IP Trunk List screen.
Figure 77: The IP route icon in the Actions column
The IP Route Configuration screen appears.

2. The IP Route Configuration screen displays the extension ranges available for
private-network routing. Modify these ranges, if any, and click Continue. The IP Trunk List
appears. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to
proceed to the CO Trunk List screen. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 184.

Displaying trunk status

1. To display the trunk’s operational status, click the trunk status icon in the Actions column
of the IP Trunk List screen.
Figure 78: The trunk status icon in the Actions column
The IP Trunk Status screen appears.

2. The IP Trunk Status screen displays the operational status of the trunk. To refresh the
information, click Refresh. Otherwise, click Continue. The IP Trunk List appears. Select
an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the CO
Trunk List screen. See The CO Trunk List screen on page 184.
Removing a trunk
1. To remove a trunk, click the trunk’s remove icon in the Actions column of the IP Trunk List
screen.
Figure 79: The remove trunk icon in the Action column
A message appears asking if you want to remove the trunk.

2. Click OK to remove the trunk. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click
Continue to proceed to the CO Trunk List screen.

Configuring a trunk media module

1. To configure a trunk media module, click Continue from the IP Trunk List screen. The CO
Trunk List screen appears. Use this screen which lists trunk media modules detected in
the G450 to configure a media module and run diagnostics. To configure or run diagnostics
on a trunk media module, click the Actions icon for the module.
Figure 80: The CO Trunk List screen
2. Select an additional action from the Actions column, or click Continue to proceed to the
CO Trunk List screen.
Endpoint installation
The Endpoint section appears in the wizard only if you selected the option to use this wizard to
create basic translations in the Translation Source screen (see step 7). If you did not select the
option to use this wizard to create basic translations in the Translation Source screen, skip to
Alarm configuration on page 185.
For instructions on endpoint installation, click Continue from the CO Trunk List screen. The
Endpoint Installation screen appears. You can access endpoint installation information from this
screen.
Alarm configuration
1. To display modem status and configure alarms, click Continue from the Endpoint
Installation screen if you selected the option to create basic translations in the Translation
Source screen, or the USB modem screen otherwise. The Modem Status & Configuration
screen appears. Perform the following actions from this screen:
● Click Reset to reset the modem
● Click Refresh to re-detect and test the modem
● Select the appropriate modem access policy in the Modem Access area
2. Click Continue. The OSS Configuration screen appears. Enter the required information
from the ART tool. For information on using the ART tool, see Running the Automatic
Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP address on page 24.
Figure 81: The OSS Configuration screen

3. Click Continue. The SNMP Configuration screen appears. Check Enable SNMP
Alarming if you want to enable the sending of SNMP traps to the INADS. Check the
Alarm Abbreviation checkbox if you want to enable SNMP alarm abbreviation. Click Add
Trap Destination to add an SNMP trap destination IP address. You can add multiple
destinations. For each destination, enter the INADS IP address in the Destination IP
Address field. In the Community Name field, enter an SNMP community access string.
Check the Enable checkbox to enable each trap destination.
Figure 82: The SNMP Configuration screen
Password and final screens

1. To change your password (optional) and complete the installation, click Continue from the
SNMP Configuration screen.
The Change Root Password screen appears. This screen enables you to change the root
password on the G450.
2. Click Continue. The Authentication File screen appears if there is a resident server on the
gateway and if you selected Translations will be added after the installation has been
completed using the SAT, ProVision, ASA or another Integrated Management tool in
the Translation Source screen (Figure 63).
The Authentication File screen displays the installed status of the authentication file and
enables you to install or replace the file from the laptop or LAN source. Without a valid
authentication file, you cannot access the Avaya Aura Communication Manager. If the
screen displays Not Installed, you must install the file now. To install a new authentication
file:
a. Check Install New Authentication file.
b. Enter the full path of the authentication file in the File Path field.
3. Click Continue. The Finish Up screen appears. This screen enables you to save the
installation log file to your laptop. To save the installation log file:
a. Click Save Log File. A dialog box appears.
b. Click Save.
! WARNING:
WARNING: Do not click Open. Clicking Open will damage the log file and may cause other
problems to the Avaya IW.
c. Press <F5> to restore the Back and Continue buttons to the Finish Up screen.
4. Click Continue. If you have not installed an allocation license file, a warning appears
reminding you to install this file.
5. Click Continue. The Verify Gateway Installation screen appears. This screen displays a
list of CLI commands that you can use to verify the G450 configuration.
6. Click Continue. The Launch Device Manager screen appears. Click Launch Device
Manager to launch the Gateway Device Manager, an application that enables you to
configure the WAN Router and perform other advanced configuration tasks.
7. Click Continue. The Congratulations! screen appears to inform you that the installation is
complete. To exit the Avaya IW, click Finish.
The Exit AIW screen appears.

Appendix D: Running the Gateway
Installation Wizard (GIW)
If you did not install an S8300 in the G450, you can use the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW)
to perform the configurations required to complete the installation. GIW prompts you for all the
configurations required to complete the installation. If you have an EPW (see Obtaining the
Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) on page 25), you will be able to upload
configuration parameters from the EPW to GIW as part of your GIW session.
GIW includes the option to enable a modem connected to the S8300. This appendix describes
how to run GIW, and how to connect and test a modem if you choose to enable the modem.
Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW)

Running the GIW performs a basic configuration of the G450. The configuration can include:
● Configuring the Primary Management Interface (PMI)
● Setting SNMP communities and trap destinations
● Upgrading firmware
● Enabling a modem on the G450
Performing a basic configuration of the G450

Note:
Note:
CD or downloaded from the Web. For information about downloading firmware
upgrades from the Web to the TFTP server, see Downloading G450 firmware files
to a local TFTP server on page 111.

2. Download GIW (Gateway Installation Wizard) from the Avaya Support website
(support.avaya.com/avayaiw) to the laptop computer. The laptop should be running
4. Plug the RJ-45 connector at the other end of the cable into the CON port of the G450.
appears.
9. Click Continue. The Initializing the Components screen appears.
Figure 83: Initializing the Components screen
10. Select Initialize the Gateway Installation Session.

11. Click Continue. The Import Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet screen appears.
12. If you have an EPW on your laptop (see Obtaining the Electronic Preinstallation
Worksheet (EPW) on page 25), check Import EPW. If you are using GIW to only upgrade
files, verify that Import EPW is unchecked.
13. Browse to the EPW file on your laptop. Any values that are included in the EPW will
appear as default values from now on as you move through this wizard.
14. Click Continue. The IP Addresses screen appears.
The IP Addresses screen displays automatically detected information about the G450,
such as what media modules are installed in the media modules slots.
15. If you are using GIW only to upgrade firmware, continue with step 25.
16. Click in the Action column. The PMI screen appears.
Figure 84: The PMI screen
17. In the PMI screen, specify the details of the Primary Management Interface (PMI) for the
G450. The PMI is used as the IP address of the G450 for specific management functions.
If you do not know which interface to designate as the PMI, check with your project
manager.

19. In the SNMP V1 screen, specify SNMP V1 community strings for Read Only and Read
Write access.
21. If you want to configure an SNMP V3 user on the G450:

a. In the User Name field, enter a string of up to 32 characters representing the SNMP
V3 user.
b. In the Authentication Protocol field, select the authentication protocol by which the
SNMP V3 user should be authenticated (SHA1 or MD5).
c. In the Authentication Password field, enter a string of between 8 and 64 characters
specifying the user’s authentication password. The authentication password is
transformed using the authentication protocol and the SNMP engine ID to create an
authentication key.
d. In the Re-enter Authentication Password field, enter the authentication password
again for verification.
e. In the Privacy Password field, enter a string of between 8 and 64 characters
specifying the SNMP V3 user’s privacy password.
f. In the Re-enter Privacy Password field, enter the privacy password again for
verification.
22. Click Continue. The IP Addresses - Media Gateway Controller List screen appears.

Figure 87: The IP Addresses - Media Gateway Controller List screen
23. In the Media Gateway Controller List screen:

a. Specify the IP address of the primary Media Gateway Controller (MGC) in the first IP
address box.
b. Specify the IP addresses of up to three additional MGCs, optionally, in the subsequent
boxes.
c. Specify Transition Point information.
d. Click Ping Test to test the accessibility of each MGC.
24. Click Continue. You return to the IP addresses screen.
25. Click Continue. The Firmware screen appears.
Figure 88: The Firmware screen
26. In the Firmware screen:

a. Upload any firmware upgrades you need to install to your TFTP server.
b. In the TFTP Address field, enter the address of your TFTP server.
c. In the TFTP Directory field, enter the name of the directory on the TFTP server in
which the upgrade files are located.
d. In the table, check the Select box for all firmware components you want to upgrade.
The current version of each component is listed to help you confirm the need for
upgrade.
e. Enter the file name of each firmware upgrade file you want to install in each line of the
table where you checked the Select box.
27. Click Continue. The firmware is upgraded and the Change Master Key - Optional screen
appears. The master key is used to encrypt gateway secrets (passwords, etc.) in the
gateway configuration file.
28. If you want to change the master key, enter the new master key passphrase in the Create
Master Key field, and then confirm by entering it again in the Confirm Master Key field. A
new master key is generated from the passphrase.
29. Click Continue. The Gateway Authentication screen appears.

Figure 89: The Gateway Authentication screen
30. If you have a service contract, the G450 is shipped with an authentication file. This
authentication file is required for Avaya services personnel to allow them secure remote
access to the gateway.
31. Click Continue. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Status screen appears. View the status
of the Field Replaceable Units detected in the G450.
32. Click Continue. The TFTP Server screen appears. The TFTP Server screen enables you
to upload firmware and configuration files for IP phone upgrades to the G450 TFTP server.
Figure 90: The TFTP Server screen - part 1
33. If you want to upload configuration and firmware files for IP phones to the G450 TFTP
Server, do the following:
a. In the Server IP Address field, enter the IP address of the machine hosting the files
that are to be uploaded.
b. Select the file transfer protocol (TFTP, FTP, or SCP) you want to use to upload the files
from the host machine. TFTP is selected by default.
The use of the SCP protocol is limited to copying files of 1 MB or less. Therefore, an
SCP server can be used for copying the script files, which do not exceed 128 KB, but
cannot be used for copying image files.
c. If you selected FTP or SCP, enter the username and password in the Username and
Password fields, and re-enter the password for confirmation in the Re-enter
Password field.
34. Click Continue.

Figure 91: The TFTP Server screen - part 2
35. In the Select column, check any files you wish to upload.
Note:
Note: If you selected SCP as your upload protocol, the checkboxes for the phone
images are disabled. If a green circled checkmark is displayed in the Uploaded
column, the file has already been uploaded.
36. Click Continue. The files are uploaded and the G450 Modem Type Selection screen
appears. If you are using GIW only to upgrade firmware, click Continue until you reach the
Finish Up screen. Go to step 42.
37. If you do not need to connect a modem to the G450, select None. If you do need to
connect a modem to the G450, select the type of modem you want to connect.
38. Click Continue. The appropriate modem configuration screen appears.
Figure 92: The G450 Serial Modem Configuration screen

Figure 93: G450 USB Modem Configuration screen
39. To configure the modem:

a. In the PPP IP Address field, enter the RAS IP address of the modem obtained using
the ART tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP
address on page 24.
b. Enter the PPP Subnet Mask.
c. Select the authentication method:
● If you have an Avaya Service contract, check Enable ASG Authentication to
enable remote access to the device.
- In the CHAP Secret field, enter the CHAP secret key obtained using the ART
tool. See Running the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the RAS IP
address on page 24.
40. Click Continue. The Change Root Password screen appears.
41. If you would like to change the password on the G450 Media Gateway, enter the current
password in the Current Password field, enter a new password in the New Password field,
and re-enter the new password in the Confirm New Password field.
Connect a modem, if necessary
42. Click Continue. The Finish Up screen appears.

Follow the on-screen instructions if you want to save the installation log file. Further
configurations, as described in this screen, can now be performed either remotely, via a
modem that you enabled with GIW, or locally.
Connect a modem, if necessary

If you enabled a serial or USB modem on the G450 during your GIW session, you can now
connect the modem.
Connecting a serial modem

1. Connect the serial modem to a working telephone line.
2. Connect the provided DB-25 adapter to the modem.
3. Disconnect the flat cable from the COM port of the laptop computer.
4. Connect the flat cable to the DB-25 connector on the modem.
Connecting a USB modem

1. Connect a USB modem to a working telephone line.
Note:
Note: See USB modems supported by the G450 on page 154 for a list of supported
USB modems.
2. Connect one end of a USB cable to the modem.
3. Connect the other end of the USB cable to a USB port on the G450 front panel.
Test the modem connection

If the modem is successfully initialized, the MDM LED on the G450 front panel lights.

Testing the modem

If you connected a modem, verify that the MDM LED is lit, and then dial into the modem to
check that you can authenticate to the modem.
Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct
systems
This appendix provides information and wiring examples of installation procedures for various
telephone and console power supplies.
In addition, you may need to install one or more adjunct systems or devices. Follow the
instructions in:
● IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application on page 207
● INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system on page 209
● Call center on page 209
● Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) on page 212
● Terminal server installation on page 215
● Call Detail Recording (CDR) on page 228
● Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package on page 231
● Printers on page 232
● DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack on page 233
● External modems on page 248
● Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U.S. installations on page 250
● Music-on-hold on page 251
● Paging and announcement equipment on page 255
● Adjunct Information Sources on page 256
For these adjunct systems, consult the documentation specific to the system for complete
installation instructions.
Your planning documentation specifies the equipment you will be installing.
! WARNING:
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords
when installing telephones or adjuncts.

Power supplies and adjunct systems
Typical adjunct power connections

The 400B2 adapter is convenient for connecting local -48 VDC power to a modular plug. See
Figure 94.
Each port network can provide power for up to three attendant consoles. This source of power
is preferred for the attendant consoles because it has the same battery backup as the G450
Media Gateway.
Refer to Documentation for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers CD,
03-300151, for detailed power supply information and installation procedures.
Figure 94: 400B2 Adapter Connecting to a Modular Plug
r749428 KLC 060396
Figure notes:
1. Flush-Mounted Information Outlet 4. 400B2 Adapter

2. Surface-Mounted Information 5. To Telephone
Outlet 6. Destination Service Access Point
3. To Individual Power Unit (DSAP) Power Cord
Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end
Typical adjunct power connections end-to-end

Figure 95 shows typical connection locations for adjunct power.
Figure 95: Example Adjunct Power Connections
13 12
6 8 10
2
9
1 4
11
5 7
14 14
cydmapwr EWS 052898
Figure notes:
1. Typical display telephone 9. 100P6A patch cord or jumpers

2. Individual power supply (Such as 1151B/ 10. System side of MDF
C) (Not used if item 14 is used) 11. 25-pair cable to digital line
3. 400B2 adapter modular jack
4. Information outlet (modular jack) 12. Equipment room
5. 4-pair D-Inside Wire (DIW) cable 13. Satellite location
6. Satellite site or adapter location 14. Bulk power supply. Install at
7. 25-pair D-Inside Wire (DIW) cable satellite location or equipment
8. Station side of MDF room (not both).
Auxiliary power for an attendant console

The nonessential functions of an attendant console and its optional 26A1 or 24A1 selector
console derive power from an auxiliary power source. Provide auxiliary power for an attendant
console through this cable so the console remains fully operational during short power outages.
Note:
Note: Only 1 console can derive auxiliary power from the system and through the
auxiliary cable located in the trunk/auxiliary field.
A console’s maximum distance from its auxiliary power source is:
● 800 ft (244 m) for a 302A1

● 350 ft (107 m) for a 301B1 and 302D

An attendant console can also derive auxiliary power from:
● Individual 1151B/C or 1151B2/C2 power supply
● MSP-1 power supply
● 258A-type adapters
● Bulk power supplies
Local and Phantom Power

An attendant console’s maximum distance from the system is limited. See Table 27.
Table 27: Attendant Console Cabling Distances
Enhanced Attendant 24 AWG Wire (0.26 mm2) 26 AWG Wire (0.14 mm2)
Console (302D)
Feet Meters Feet Meters
With Selector Console

Phantom powered 800 244 500 152
Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037
Without Selector
Console
Phantom powered 1400 427 900 274
Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging application

The IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Application runs on a G450 Media Gateway controlled
by an S8300 Server. Without the need for additional hardware, IA770 INTUITY AUDIX software
processes touchtones, converts messages to the G.711 format, and converts text to speech.
Note:
Note: For complete information on IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Installations, see Avaya
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging, Release 3.0, Installation, Upgrades, and
Troubleshooting, 11-300532.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION: IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging processes messages using the G.711 codec
only. Therefore, ensure that a codec set exists that uses only the G.711 codec.
Then, assign that codec set to a network region. And, finally, assign that network
region to the AUDIX signaling group that is linked to the IA770 INTUITY AUDIX
Messaging trunk group.
Shared resources of IA 770 coresidency

An IA770 uses many resources of the S8300 Server and the media gateway where it resides.
The following list outlines the S8300’s shared resources used by the IA770 INTUITY AUDIX
system:
● Hardware for data storage and retrieval
● TFTP server for:
- Downloading and updating the license file for feature activation
- Backing up and restoring data over a LAN or a WAN, including translations and
messages
- Updating and upgrading software
● IP address for administration access
● General Alarm Manager for alarm display
● Web interface to start and stop the system
The IA770 system also shares the same switch-tone parameters established for the S8300
Server. With the software-only version of the IA770 system that is currently sold, the S8300
Server handles switch tones on behalf of the IA770 system and passes on the control
information to the IA770 system using QSIG signaling. With the IA770 system that uses a
CWY1 board, the installer or administrator must set IA770 parameters to match those of the
S8300 Server.

Where is the IA770 location and software

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging is a software-only version of INTUITY AUDIX messaging
that uses a QSIG-MWI H.323 virtual trunk for communication between the Communication
Manager and IA770 software. The INTUITY AUDIX system software is loaded directly onto the
S8300 hard drive.
Note:
Note: For upgrades only, a G450 Media Gateway that previously used a CWY1 board
can continue to use the CWY1 board with IA770 INTUITY AUDIX software.
However, the CWY1 board is no longer available for new systems.
Using an AUDIX trunk group as well as an AUDIX hunt group for

new systems
For new systems, an H.323 virtual trunk integration must be established. The virtual trunk
group, and signaling group, setup is handled automatically when you install IA770 INTUITY
AUDIX Messaging with the Avaya Installation Wizard. Otherwise, you must administer the trunk
group, its signaling group, and the assigned network region and IP codec set with
Communication Manager once the software is installed. The number of trunks assigned to the
trunk group can be either 3, 6, or 12.
The use of trunks replaces the need for voice ports in the hunt group. However, an INTUITY
AUDIX hunt group must still be defined. The hunt group setup is also handled automatically
when you install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging with the Avaya Installation Wizard.
Otherwise, you must administer the hunt group using Communication Manager. Other switch
administration tasks that are associated with proper hunt group functions, such as creating
COR, COS, and coverage paths, are also required.
IA770 INTUITY AUDIX installations and S8300

upgrades for IA770 INTUITY AUDIX
The INTUITY AUDIX software must be installed or upgraded at the same time as the S8300
Communication Manager software load (the .rpm files). The IA770 software is delivered on the
Communication Manager software distribution CD. The Communication Manager installation
tools install IA770 INTUITY AUDIX automatically.
For complete information on IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Installations Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX
Messaging, Release 3.0, Installation, Upgrades, and Troubleshooting, 11-300532.
INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system
INTUITY AUDIX LX messaging system

The process of integrating an INTUITY AUDIX LX system with an Avaya S8300 Server involves
a series of tasks to prepare the switch to work with the INTUITY AUDIX LX system.
The procedures for this process are fully documented in INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1.0
Documentation, 585-313-818. The information is contained in a document with the title INTUITY
AUDIX LX Release 1.0 LAN Integration with S8300 and DEFINITY® Systems.
Call center
The S8300 Server provides an excellent solution for a small call center. The S8300 Server with
the G450 Media Gateway supports the following call center capabilities:
● All three Avaya call center packages:
- Avaya Call Center Basic
- Avaya Call Center Deluxe
- Avaya Call Center Elite
● Up to 450 agents
● A maximum of 16 ASAI links
● Avaya G450 announcement software
About Avaya G450 announcement software

Voice announcements are used in a call center environment to announce delays, direct
customers to different departments, and entertain and inform calling parties. The announcement
capability is standard and comes co-resident on the G450. You can substantially increase the
number of supported announcement files on the gateway if you install a compact flash and
increased RAM (refer to Installing the upgrade memory kit on page 88). The G450
announcement software has many of the functions of the TN2501AP VAL circuit pack.
See Table 28 for differences between the Avaya G450 Announcement software and the VAL
circuit pack. For more information on Avaya G450 Announcement software, see the

Administrator Guide for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 03-300509, Chapter 13,
"Managing Announcements".
Table 28: Comparison between the G450 Announcement software and the
VAL circuit pack
Area TN2501AP (VAL) circuit Avaya G450

description pack announcement software
Requires Yes No
hardware
Maximum Up to 60 minutes at Up to 45 minutes at
storage time 64Kbps sample rate 64Kbps uncompressed
speech
Concurrent calls 50 when using a 1,000
per DEFINITY Server SI or
announcement DEFINITY Server CSI
1,000 when using the
DEFINITY Server R,
S85XX, or S87XX Server
Backup and Yes Yes
restore over
LAN
Recording Use PC or telephone Use PC or telephone
method
File portability to Yes Yes
multiple
DEFINITY or
Avaya G450
Media Gateways
Playback quality Toll quality Toll quality
Backup speed 2.6 seconds for each 2.6 seconds for each
60 seconds of 60 seconds of
announcement time announcement time
Reliability High High
Firmware Yes Yes
downloadable
Number of 5 on the DEFINITY CSI 10 per configuration
boards per and DEFINITY SI
system 10 on the DEFINITY R and
S85XX or S87XX Server
1 of 2
Call center
Table 28: Comparison between the G450 Announcement software and the
VAL circuit pack (continued)
Area TN2501AP (VAL) circuit Avaya G450

description pack announcement software
Number of 32 64
announcement
ports
Announcements 1024 256
per board
Maximum 128 DEFINITY Server CSI 3,000 over multiple G450
number of or DEFINITY Server Si Media Gateways
announcements 1,000 DEFINITY Server R
in a 3,000 S85XX, or S87XX
configuration Server
Format CCITT A-law or u-law CCITT A-law or u-law
Sample bits 8 8
Sample rate 8,000 KHz 8,000 KHz
Channels Mono Mono
2 of 2

Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

The Avaya 1000-2000 VA online Uninterruptible power systems (UPSs) provide power
protection for telecommunications systems and equipment. Avaya UPSs are a cost-effective
measure to avoid costly downtime. The Avaya UPS provides complete isolation from power
disturbances to protect customer’s data and equipment. It can keep the phones up and ensure
network reliability, but it also provides customizable alarm and monitoring capabilities.
Avaya online UPSs feature:
● Isolation of connected equipment from all incoming power problems
● Doubled battery service life and advanced warning of the end of useful battery life with
Advanced Battery Management (ABM) technology
● Prolonged backup time with Extended Battery Modules (EBMs)
● Conditioned incoming power without depleting the battery to preserve battery power for
complete power outages
● Adapted to rack-mount and standalone tower applications with two-in-one form factor
● Standard RS-232 communications port
● Standard DEFINITY alarm contacts
● Six foot communications cable included
● Web/SNMP card to add direct control and monitoring capabilities in SNMP-based
networks and via Web browsers (Optional for all models except select 1000 VA UPS)
UPS models
Avaya Equipment to protect (total load of 750VA | 523 Watts)
Holdover UPS UPS Capacity SAP

Time (mins) used
6 750 VA Line-interactive 100.0% 700427073

Rackmount UPS, RoHS
Rackmount UPS, RoHS
Rackmount UPS, RoHS
8 1000 VA Online UPS with 75.0% 700290273
Web/SNMP Card
1 of 2
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Avaya Equipment to protect (total load of 750VA | 523 Watts)
Holdover UPS UPS Capacity SAP

Time (mins) used
24 1500 VA Online UPS 50.0% 194384

w/Web card + Rail Kit
68 1000 VA Online UPS with 75.0% (1) 700290273
Web/SNMP Card and (1) 700404411
1 EBM
89 1500 VA Online UPS 50.0% (1) 194384
w/1 EBM, Web card, (1) 700404429
4-post Rail
Web/SNMP Card and (2) 700404411
2 EBM
167 1500 VA Online UPS 50.0% (1) 194384
w/2 EBM, Web card, (2) 700404429
4-post Rail
253 1500VA Online UPS 50.0% (1) 194384
w/3 EBM, Web card, (3) 700404429
4-post Rail
344 1500VA Online UPS 50.0% (1) 194384
w/4 EBM, Web card, (4) 700404429
4-post Rail
4 EBM (4) 700404577
720 1500 VA Online UPS 50.0% (1) 194384
w/1 XBU48 and Web/ (1) 700404486
SNMP Card
2 of 2
Battery runtimes (in minutes)1
1000 VA Model
Load Std Internal Batteries (1) 24V EBM (2) 24V EBMs
200 VA / 140 W 37 271 546

400 VA / 280 W 19 142 278
1 of 2

Battery runtimes (in minutes)1
1000 VA Model
Load Std Internal Batteries (1) 24V EBM (2) 24V EBMs
700 VA / 490 W 9 72 156

850 VA / 595 W 6 59 124
1000 VA / 700 W 5 48 104
2 of 2
1. This table provides typical information. Runtimes are approximate and may vary with equipment,
configuration, battery age, temperature, etc.
Full Details on these units can be found in Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Aura
Communication Manager, 555-245-207. You can also go online to find out the latest details
about UPS technology at http://www.avayaups.com/avaya/default.asp.
Terminal server installation

This section provides information on connecting adjunct equipment to a G450 Media Gateway
with an S8300 Server using a terminal server (see Figure 96). Avaya supports the IOLAN+ 104
terminal server.
Any device that does not support a direct TCP/IP connection, but that does support an RS-232
interface, can connect through a terminal server. System printers and some CDR devices use
RS-232 connections and can connect through a terminal server.
You can connect up to four adjuncts through one terminal server.
Figure 96: Switch-to-adjunct LAN connectivity through a terminal server
1
6
3 4
LAN
2
DATA CONNECTIONS ONLY - NOT FOR TELECOM USE
5
1 2 3 4 10BASE-T 5VDC
cydfadj KLC 091302

Figure notes:
1. switch 4. terminal server

2. IP connection on an S8300/G450 configuration 5. serial port
3. 10/100Base-T Hub (optional) 6. CDR adjunct

Equipment required for installing and administering the terminal

server
Make sure you have all the equipment on site before the installation. You must have the
hardware listed in Table 29.
Table 29: Required equipment
Comcode Description Qty Supplier
700015084 700409519 CUST SOL TERM SRVR 1 Avaya

4PT RHS
NA RJ45-to-DB25 connector for IOLAN+ 4 Avaya
(supplied with 700015084)
NA DB25-to-DB9 connector for PC COM 1 Avaya
port
NA RS-232 Null modem (if needed for PC 1 or Avaya
or printer connectivity) more
405369042 Male/female adapter (if necessary) 1 or Avaya
more
846943306 6-inch RJ45 crossover cord, or 1 Avaya
or
104154414 10/100Base-T auto-sensing LAN hub 1 Customer
NA or router
102631413 259A adapter, or 1 Avaya
NA CAT5 cross connect hardware and Customer
connecting blocks
NA RJ45 UTP Category 5 modular cords 1–2 Customer
NA 451A in-line RJ45 adapters, as
needed to connect modular cords
together
You also need a computer (laptop) with the HyperTerminal software program for the initial
administration of the IOLAN+ and to set up the ports.
What are the distance limits for the terminal server

The distance limit from the switch to the LAN hub is 328 ft (100 meters). The distance limit from
the LAN hub to the terminal server is 328 ft (100 meters). If installed, the limit from the terminal
server to the adjunct is 50 ft (15 meters).
However, to achieve greater distance limits, the switch’s LAN hub/router may be connected to a
WAN and the hub/router for the terminal server also connected to the same WAN.
How is the terminal server cabling connected

Figure 97 shows the connection between the terminal server port and a call accounting system.
Figure 97: Stand-alone call accounting system link using a terminal server
Standalone
259A Adapter, Call Accounting
Switch 356A Adapter (Jack #1), or
258B Adapter (Jack #1)
Terminal Server M25A or M25B

RS232 Cable Call
Hub or Accounting
C-LAN Router «
Port
RJ45 Cat 5 RJ45 Cat 5
Modular Cord Modular Cord
AC Power
clan2gca.cdr 328 ft max 328 ft max 50 Ft. Maximum

(100 m) (100 m)
Demarcation
Point
Connecting the IOLAN+ to the adjunct and the LAN

Connect the adjunct to the IOLAN+, using the RJ45-to-DB25 cable and the null modem. You
can use a male/female adapter (see Figure 98).

Figure 98: Connecting an adjunct to the IOLAN+
8 6
2 5
5 4
7
cydfrcon KLC 021201
7
1
DATA CONNECTIONS ONLY - NOT FOR TELECOM USE
1 2 3 4 10BASE-T 5VDC
3
Figure notes:
1. IP connection on an S8300/G450 5. Null modem

2. Local area network (LAN) 6. PC or laptop (for initial
3. IOLAN+ 104 terminal server administration)
4. Adjunct (system management terminal or 7. DB25-to-RJ45 cable
a system printer, for example) 8. DB25-to-DB9 cable
Follow these typical steps:

Note:
Note: Depending on the adjunct’s connections, you may not need all of these pieces.
1. Connect the null modem adapter to COM1 port on the adjunct.
Note:
Note: The null modem is an important element in this setup. Without it, data may not
transfer correctly.
2. Connect the other end of the null modem adapter to the DB25 to RJ-45 cable.
3. Connect the RJ-45 end to any port on the IOLAN+.
Administering the IOLAN+

To administer the IOLAN+ the first time, you must connect a PC or laptop to the RS-232 Port 1
on the IOLAN+ terminal server. Follow these typical steps:
1. Connecting the IOLAN+ on page 219
2. Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer on page 219
3. Administering the IOLAN+ the first time on page 219
4. Rebooting the IOLAN+ on page 222

Note:
Note: Depending on the computer’s COM port, you may not need all of these pieces.
Connecting the IOLAN+

1. Connect the DB9 end of the DB9-to-DB25 cable to the COM port on the PC or laptop.
2. Connect the DB25 end to the null modem adapter.
3. Connect the other end of the null modem adapter to the DB25 to RJ-45 cable.
4. Connect the RJ-45 end to Port 1 of the IOLAN+.
5. Before beginning the initial administration, make sure you have the following information:
● New IP address and subnet mask for IOLAN+
● Host name for IOLAN+
● IP address of S8300 Server Ethernet interface
● Port number of S8300 Server Ethernet interface where adjunct connects
Use the HyperTerminal software program that comes with Windows 95/98/NT/2000 to
administer the IOLAN+.
Setting up HyperTerminal on the computer

1. Open HyperTerminal.
2. Click the File > Properties > Connect tab.
a. In the Connect using: field, select COM n,
where n is the communication port your computer is using.
3. Click CONFIGURE
a. Set the bits per second field to 9600.
b. Set the Flow control field to Hardware.
4. Click OK.
5. Press ENTER to get the login prompt.
Administering the IOLAN+ the first time

1. At the login prompt type any text and press ENTER.

2. At the second prompt type set term ansi and press ENTER to view the Connections
Menu.
Name: port 2 CONNECTIONS MENU Terminal: 2
Connection Host
1 *** FREE ** === Commands ===

2 *** FREE ** | Telnet ^T|
3 *** FREE ** | Rlogin ^R|
4 *** FREE ** | Port ^P|
| Admin mode ^A|
| CLI |
| Lock |
| Logout ^D|
================
___________________________________________________________________________
IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi iolan
3. Under Connection select Port 1 (the port to which the adjunct is connected) and press
ENTER to access the Commands menu.
4. Select Admin mode > Password and press ENTER.
Name: port 2 ADMINISTRATION MENU Terminal: 2
gateway Examine/modify gateway table.

host Examine/modify host table.
line Terminal configuration organised by line.
password Specify password to allow modification of menu items.
port Terminal configuration organised by port.
quit Return to connections menu.
server Examine/modify Server parameters.
stats Examine Server statistics.
Password [ ]
___________________________________________________________________________
IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi iolan-st
5. Type iolan, the default password, and press ENTER.

The Administration Menu changes, offering more options.
6. Select server and press ENTER to view the Server Configuration menu.
** Administrator ** SERVER CONFIGURATION Terminal: 2
Name [iolan ] Debug mode [0 ]

IP address [123.45.67.89 ]
Subnet mask [222.222.0.0 ]
Ethernet address [00:80:d4:03:11:cd] Ethernet interface [AUTO]
Language [English ]
Identification [ ]
Lock [Disabled]
Password limit [5 ]
CR to initiate [No ]
SNAP encoding [Disabled]
Boot host [ ] Boot diagnostics [Enabled ]
Boot file [ ]
Init file [ ]
MOTD file [ ]
Domain name [ ]
Name server [ ] NS Port [53 ]
WINS server [ ]
___________________________________________________________________________
Name used for prompts and message on bottom right of screen.
7. Fill in the following fields with information appropriate to your network.

Leave the default settings for the other fields.
● Name:
● IP address: (for IOLAN+)
● Subnet mask:
8. Press ENTER and select Save & Exit to effect the changes.
You must reboot the server any time you change an IP address or Local Port value.

Rebooting the IOLAN+

1. Press ENTER to view the Administration Menu.
** Administrator ** ADMINISTRATION MENU Terminal: 2
access Remote System Access (PPP).

change Change login and/or admin password.
gateway Examine/modify gateway table.
host Examine/modify host table.
kill Kill TCP connections on serial line.
line Terminal configuration organised by line.
port Terminal configuration organised by port.
quit Return to connections menu.
reboot Reboot Server.
server Examine/modify Server parameters.
stats Examine Server statistics.
trap Examine/modify SNMP Trap parameters.
Port [2 ]
____________________________________________________________________________
Note:
Note: The following steps re-initialize the IOLAN+ so it knows it's connected to the LAN
through its IP address.
2. Select reboot and press ENTER.
3. Press the space bar to restart the IOLAN+.
Navigating the IOLAN+ terminal server

Refer to the IOLAN+ user guide for details. In general, you must:
● Use the arrow keys to move to a menu item
● Use the TAB key to move from field to field horizontally
● Use the ENTER key to choose an item
Administering the gateway

You need to administer the gateway only if the S8300 Server and IOLAN+ are not in the same
subnet.
Note:
Note: If the S8300 Server and IOLAN+ are in the same subnet, skip this procedure.
2. Type iolan and press ENTER.
3. Select gateway to access the Gateway menu.
4. Fill in the following fields for Entry 1:
● Destination: S8300 Server IP address
● Gateway: Gateway address
● Netmask: Subnet mask
Note:
Note: The following steps re-initialize the IOLAN+ so it knows it's connected to the LAN
through your gateway.
5. Select reboot and press ENTER.
6. Press the space bar to restart the IOLAN+.
Administering an IOLAN+ port

Use this procedure when connecting an adjunct or serial COM port on a PC directly (locally) to
the IOLAN+ (see Figure 98: Connecting an adjunct to the IOLAN+ on page 218).
2. Type iolan and press ENTER.
3. Select port and press ENTER.

4. Type port number and press ENTER to view the Port Setup Menu
where port number is the port that the adjunct connects to.
** Administrator ** PORT SETUP MENU Terminal: 2

Hardware Flow ctrl Keys
Speed [9600 ] Flow ctrl [xon/xoff] Hot [^]] Intr [^C]
Parity [None] Input Flow [Enabled ] Quit [^@] Kill [^U]
Bit [8] Output Flow [Enabled ] Del [^@] Sess [^@]
Stop [1 ] Echo [^@]
Break [Disabled] IP Addresses
Monitor DSR [Yes ] Src [ ] Mask [ ]
Monitor DCD [No ] Dst [ ]
User Options Access

Name [port 2 ] Keepalive [No ] Access [Remote ]
Terminal type [undef ] Rlogin/Telnet [Telnet] Authentication [None ]
TERM [ ] Debug options [No ] Mode [Raw ]
Video pages [0] Map CR to CR LF [No ] Connection [None ]
CLI/Menu [CLI] Hex data [No ] Host [ ]
Reset Term [No ] Secure [No ] Remote Port [0 ]
MOTD [No ] Local Port [5101]
________________________________________________________________________________
5. Fill in the following fields.

Leave the default settings for the other fields.
● Speed: 9600
● Monitor DSR: Yes
● Monitor DCD: No
● Name: port number or other descriptive name
● Terminal type: undef
● CLI/Menu: CLI
● Reset Term: No
● Flow ctrl: xon/xoff
● IP addresses: leave blank
● Mask: leave blank
● Access: Remote
● Authentication: None
● Mode: Raw
● Connection: None
● Host: leave blank or enter S8300 Server IP Address

● Remote Port: 0
● Local Port: must match the value of Remote Port on the IP Services screen of the
Communication Manager software
6. Press ENTER and select Save & Exit to effect the changes.
7. Press ENTER again to view the Administration Menu.
8. Select kill to disable the port connection.
9. Repeat the steps for each additional port you want to administer.
10. When administration is complete, from the Connections Menu, select logout (or press
Ctrl D).
11. Close HyperTerminal.
At this point, you have established a connection path from the adjunct through the IOLAN+ to
the S8300 Server.
Testing connectivity through the IOLAN+

1. On the system management terminal, press ENTER to get the login prompt to the
Communication Manager switch.
Note:
Note: If you get garbled text, check the baud rate setting on the Port Setup Menu. You
can adjust it up or down.
2. If no login prompt appears, log back into the IOLAN+ through HyperTerminal.
3. Select Admin mode > stats and press ENTER twice.
4. Select users and press ENTER.

5. Look at the port that the adjunct is connected to and see if there is any traffic.
If not, check all your connections and administration fields.
** Administrator ** SERVER STATISTICS Terminal: 2

1. port1 Talking to host 172.22.22.67.5111<DSR+CTS+DCD >DTR+RTS
2. port 2 SERVER STATISTICS <DSR+DCD >DTR+RTS
3. port 3 waiting for DSR or DCD >DTR+RTS
4. port 4 modem waiting for DSR or DCD >DTR+RTS
REM <unknown> logged out
LOG logger not enabled
___________________________________________________________________________
Press <RETURN> to see list of options.

IOLAN PLUS v4.02.00 a CDi iolan-st
After you have successfully administered and validated the connection between the adjunct and
the S8300 Server through the IOLAN+, you can disconnect the laptop or other PC from the
IOLAN+. No further IOLAN+ administration is required.
Potential failure scenarios and repair actions

If a link goes down between the terminal server and the switch, you must reboot the terminal
server for the link come back up. If you are performing a software upgrade or if a system reset
occurs, you must reboot the terminal server to restore the link. See Rebooting the IOLAN+ on
page 222 for instructions.
Administering IP services
For each adjunct that you connect using TCP/IP, you need to administer IP services to establish
the IP address/TCP port pairing. The IP address is associated with the node name that you just
administered. In this example, we are administering the primary call detail recording (CDR)
connection as end-to-end TCP/IP.
1. Type change ip-services and press ENTER to assign the CDR endpoint.
2. In the Service Type field, enter CDR1 for the call accounting link.
change ip-services Page 1 of 3
IP SERVICES
Service Enabled Local Local Remote Remote
Type Node Port Node Port
CDR1 procr 0 callacctg 5101
3. In the Local Node field, enter the node name for the switch.
In this example, enter procr.
4. The Local Port field defaults to 0 for all client applications.
You cannot make an entry in this field.
5. In the Remote Node field, enter the node name for the adjunct, as administered on the
Node Names screen.
For the call accounting application, type callacctg.
6. In the Remote Port field, enter the TCP listen port assigned to the adjunct.
The recommended value for CDR1 is 5101.
Note:
Note: This number must match the port administered on the end device. If you are
using the Downloadable Reliable Session-Layer Protocol tool, this must match
the port administered in the Server application. If you are using a terminal server,
this number must match the Local Port number on the Port Setup menu.
Consult the documentation for your Call Accounting system to determine the
appropriate port for the CDR device.
7. Go to Page 3 and type n in the Reliable Protocol field for the CDR Service Type.
You do not use RSP with a terminal server.
change ip-services Page 3 of 3
SESSION LAYER TIMERS

Service Reliable Packet Resp Session Connect SPDU Connectivity
Type Protocol Timer Message Cntr Cntr Timer
CDR1 n 3 1 1 1
8. Press ENTER to save your changes.

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

This section provides information on connecting Call Detail Recording (CDR) equipment.
Connecting CDR equipment

The interface between an Avaya server and CDR equipment is a Processor Ethernet
Connection.
As with C-LAN connections, the CDR adjunct may be a terminal server or a CDR application
using RSP.
Note:
Note: A printer or customer premises equipment (CPE) can also be used as the output
receiving device.
Administering CDR data collection

Note:
Note: To send CDR data using a processor Ethernet interface to a device on the LAN/
WAN, you have the option to enable/disable RSP.
1. Setup the CDR adjunct to be ready to collect CDR data.
Record the IP address and the port number of the CDR adjunct, which could be a
terminal server or a CDR application that uses RSP.
If the CDR adjunct is an application that uses RSP, start the application to listen for a client
connection at the port.
2. Access the IP Services screen in Communication Manager (see Administering IP
services on page 226), and do the following:
a. In the Service Type field, enter CDR1 or CDR2.
b. In the Local Node field, enter procr.
c. The Local Port field defaults to 0 for all client applications.
d. You cannot make an entry in this field.
e. In the Remote Node field, enter the node name you assigned to the CDR adjunct in
step 2.
f. In the Remote Port field, enter the port number used by the CDR adjunct determined
in step 1.
Call Detail Recording (CDR)
3. Go to Page 3 and do the following:

a. Enter y in the Reliable Protocol field if you have a CDR application using RSP.
b. Enter n if the CDR adjunct is connected through a terminal server.
c. If RSP is being used, complete the Packet Resp Timer and Connectivity Timer fields
with a reasonable value that matches the network condition (recommended values are
30 and 60 seconds, respectively).
d. Accept the defaults in the other fields.
4. Administer CDR parameters as described in Administering CDR parameters on page 229.
Administering CDR parameters

You must administer CDR parameters to let the system know that the adjunct is connected
through TCP/IP. For details on all fields on the CDR System Parameters screen, see
Administrator Guide for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 03-300509.
1. Type change system-parameters cdr and press ENTER.
The CDR System Parameters screen appears.
change system-parameters cdr Page 1 of 1

CDR SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Node Number (Local PBX ID): CDR Date Format: month/day

Primary Output Format: unformatted Primary Output Endpoint: CDR1
Secondary Output Format: unformatted Secondary Output Endpoint: CDR2
Use ISDN Layouts? n EIA Device Bit Rate: 9600
Use Enhanced Formats? n Condition Code ‘T’ for Redirected Calls? n
Modified Circuit ID Display? n Remove # From Called Number? n
Record Outgoing Calls Only? y Intra-switch CDR? n
Suppress CDR for Ineffective Call Attempts? y CDR Call Splitting? y
Disconnect Information in Place of FRL? n Outg Attd Call Record? y
Interworking Feat-flag? n
Force Entry of Acct Code for Calls Marked on Toll Analysis Form? n
Calls to Hunt Group - Record: member-ext
Record Called Vector Directory Number Instead of Group or Member? n
Record Called Agent Login ID Instead of Group or Member? n
Inc Trk Call Splitting? n
Record Non-Call-Assoc TSC? n Call Record Handling Option: warning
Record Call-Assoc TSC? n Digits to Record for Outgoing Calls: dialed
Privacy - Digits to Hide: 0 CDR Account Code Length: 4
2. In the Primary Output Format field, enter a format specific to the call accounting system,
if necessary.
In the example, unformatted is used. If you were sending data directly to a printer, you
would use printer.

3. In the Primary Output Endpoint field, type CDR1.

4. If you use a secondary output device, and that device is also connected through TCP/IP,
complete the Secondary Output Format field.
Also, type CDR2 in the Secondary Output Endpoint field.
5. Press ENTER to save your changes.
Testing the switch-to-adjunct link

You can use the test, status, busyout and release commands to find and correct problems with
CDR links. For more information about these commands, see Maintenance Commands for
Avaya Aura Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers, 03-300431.
status cdr-link
CDR LINK STATUS
Primary Secondary
Link State: up extension not administered
Maintenance Busy? no
Work with the vendor to test the link from the call accounting adjunct.
If a link does not come up immediately, use the busyout cdr-link and release cdr-link
commands to bring up the link.
Additional administration procedures for CDR equipment are provided in the Administrator
Guide for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 03-300509.
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) package

Avaya provides this free software application to help vendors and customers develop CDR
applications that use the reliable session protocol to collect CDR data from an Avaya Server.
The Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) is a testing tool and thus is not supported by Avaya.
What does the RDTT package contain

The RDTT package consists of the following:
● Specifications for the Reliable Session Protocol
● The Client application (Client.exe)
This application is designed to help you test the reliable session protocol without use of an
Avaya Server.
● The Server application (Server.exe)
This application is designed to help you understand the reliable session protocol and to start
building your products to work with the Avaya Server.
● User Guide
This document contains information about the client and server applications.
Downloading the RDTT package

The RDTT package is available from the Avaya Support website as a self-extracting
executable.
1. Go to the Avaya Support website at http://avaya.com/support.
2. In the Search For text box, type reliable and click Go.
3. Select Reliable Data Transport Client/Server Tool from the list of links that are found.
4. When asked, save the RDTT.exe file to a temporary folder on your computer.
It is approximately 1.6 to 2.0 MB in size.
Installing the RDTT package

1. Double-click the RDTT.exe file.
The Install Shield Wizard steps you through the installation.

2. When prompted to select Client or Server, select both programs.

3. Continue with the installation.
Use the default destination folder and program folder.
Administering the RDTT package

See the instructions in the user_guide.doc file to administer the RDTT tool on a PC.
Related topics
See the following topics related to CDR:
● Chapter 16, “Collecting Billing Information,” in Administrator Guide for Avaya Aura
Communication Manager, 03-300509.
● “Call Detail Recording” in Chapter 21, “Features and Technical Reference” in Administrator
Guide for Avaya Aura Communication Manager, 03-300509.
Printers
For connecting a printer to a G450 Media Gateway, see Terminal server installation on
page 215 for more information.
DS1/T1 CPE loopback jack

This section provides information on how to install and use a DS1 loopback jack to test the DS1
span between the Avaya Server or Gateway and the network interface point. The loopback jack
is required when DC power is at the interface to the MM710 media module.
Note:
Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. It should always be available
for remote tests of the DS1 span.
Note:
Note: For G450 Media Gateway systems, the channel service unit (CSU) is integrated
within the MM710 media module. This means that there is no need for a separate
external device. The loopback jack isolates the MM710 internal CSU from the DC
power and properly loops the DC span power.
This section covers:
● Installing a loopback jack on page 233
● Administering a loopback jack on page 234
● Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack on page 235
● Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack on page 244
● Configurations using fiber multiplexers on page 246
Installing a loopback jack

You can use one of two installation options:
● Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack on page 234
● Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack on page 234
Selecting the loopback jack installation method

Select the installation method as follows:
● Install the loopback jack at the interface to the smart jack, if possible.
This position provides maximum coverage of CPE wiring when remote loopback tests are
run.
● If the smart jack is not accessible, install the loopback jack at the extended demarcation
point.

● If there is no extended demarcation point, install the loopback jack directly at the network
interface point as shown in Figure 99.
● If there is an extended demarcation point and the smart jack is not accessible, install the
loopback jack as shown in Figure 100.
● If there is an extended demarcation point, but the smart jack is accessible, install the
loopback jack as shown in Figure 101.
Installing a loopback jack with a smart jack

1. Disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide) connector at the appropriate interface point, and connect
the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span.
See Figure 99 through Figure 101.
2. Plug the H600-383 cable from the MM710 into the female connector on the loopback jack.
3. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network interface point.
Note:
Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. This is not a test tool and
should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span.
Installing a loopback jack without a smart jack

Install the loopback jack at the point where the cabling from the MM710 plugs into the dumb
block. However, if there is more than one dumb block, choose the one that is closest to the
Interface Termination feed or the fiber MUX, to provide maximum coverage for loopback jack
tests. Refer to Figure 102 and Figure 103.
1. Disconnect the RJ-48 (8-wide) connector at the appropriate interface point, and connect
the loopback jack in series with the DS1 span.
See Figure 102 through Figure 103.
2. Plug the H600-383 cable from the MM710 into the female connector on the loopback jack.
3. Plug the male connector on the loopback jack cable into the network interface point.
Note:
Note: Do not remove the loopback jack after installation. This is not a test tool and
should always be available to remotely test a DS1 span.
Administering a loopback jack

1. At the management terminal, type change ds1 location
where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback jack.
2. Verify that the near-end CSU type is set to integrated.

3. On page 2 of the form, change the supply CPE loopback jack power field to y.
Setting this field to y informs the technician that a loopback jack is present on the facility
and allows the technician to determine that the facility is available for remote testing.
4. Enter save translation to save the new information.
Testing a loopback jack with a smart jack

The loopback jack and smart jack isolate faults by dividing the DS1 span into three sections
(see Figure 99 through Figure 101).
These three sections are:
● From the MM710 to the loopback jack
● From the loopback jack to the smart jack (network interface point)
● From the smart jack to the CO
The first two sections are your responsibility. The last is the responsibility of the DS1 service
provider.
Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the loopback jack
The DS1 span test has 2 parts:
● Checking for circuit connectivity between the DS1 circuit pack and the loopback jack.
The first part of the test powers-up the loopback jack and sends a signal from the DS1
circuit pack, through the wiring, to the loopback jack. The test allows about 10 seconds for
the signal to loop around the loopback jack and return to the DS1 circuit pack. Then it sends
the results to the management terminal and proceeds to the second part of the test.
● The second part of the test sends the standard, 3-in-24 DS1 stress-testing pattern from the
DS1 board, through the loopback jack, and back to a bit error detector and counter on the
DS1 board. A bit-error rate counter displays the results on the management terminal until
you terminate the test.
Always perform both parts of the test. Proceed as follows.
Checking the integrity of local equipment

Before you go any further, make sure that the problem is actually on the DS1 span by testing
the equipment that connects to the span at the near end. Test the DS1 circuit pack, and perform
any needed maintenance or repairs.

1. On the SAT, type busyout board XXXVS

where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example, 002), and VS is the slot
number on the G450 of the media module (for example, V3).
2. Type change ds1 XXXVS to open the DS1 administration form.
3. Make sure that the near-end csu type field is set to integrated.
4. Go to page 2 of the DS1 administration form, and verify that the value of the TX LBO field
is 0dB.
5. If the value of the TX LBO field is not 0dB, record the current value.
Then set the TX LBO field to 0dB for testing.
6. Press ENTER to make the changes.
7. Type test ds1-loop XXXVS cpe-loopback-jack.
The loopback jack powers up. Active, DS1 facility alarms (if any) clear. After about 20
seconds, the first set of results appears on the terminal.
8. If FAIL appears on the terminal display, there may be a fault in the wiring between the
MM710 and the loopback jack or the loopback jack may itself be faulty.
Isolate the problem by replacing the loopback jack and repeating step 8.
9. If FAIL still appears after the loopback jack has been replaced, suspect a wiring problem.
Replace the cable between the MM710 and the loopback jack. Then repeat step 8.
10. When PASS appears on the terminal, proceed with the second part of the test, checking
the integrity of transmitted data.
Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop

Now perform the second part of the test, checking for data errors.
Note:
Note: The loss of signal (LOS) alarm (demand test #138) is not processed during this
test while the 3-in-24 pattern is active.
1. At the SAT, type clear meas ds1 loop XXXVS to zero out the bit-error counter
2. Type clear meas ds1 log XXXVS to zero out the performance measurement counter.
3. Type clear meas ds1 esf XXXVS to zero out the ESF error count.
4. Type list meas ds1 sum XXXVS to display the bit error count.

5. Step through Table 30 to troubleshoot.
Table 30: DS1 Troubleshooting
Condition Solution
The value of the The loopback jack test is active.

Test: cpe-loopback-jack field is
Pattern 3-in-24
The value of the Synchronized field is N Retry the test 5 times.
The value of the Synchronized field Excessive bit errors are likely. Check for
remains N after 5 tries intermittent connections or broken wires in
an SPE receive or transmit pair, and repair
as necessary. Then repeat step 1.
The value of the Bit-error count field is Repeat step 1 several times.
non-zero
The value of the Synchronized field is Y The DS1 circuit pack has synchronized to
the looped 3-in-24 pattern and is counting
bit errors in the pattern.
The value of the Bit-error count field Suspect loose or corroded connections,
pegs at 65535 or increments by 100s or severe crosstalk, or impedance imbalances
1000s each time you repeat step 1 between the two conductors of the receive
or transmit pair. Wiring may need
replacement.
The value of the Bit-error count field There are no obvious wiring problems.
is 0 Verify this by repeating step 1 at 1-minute
to 10-minute intervals until you are certain.
If the test reports no errors for 1 minute, the
error rate is less than 1 in 108. If the test
reports no errors for 10 minutes, the error
rate is less than 1 in 109.
Once you are fairly certain that the test is reporting no errors (after at least 1 error-free
minute), confirm that the 3-in-24 pattern error detector is operating.
6. Type test ds1-loop XXXVS inject-single-bit-error.
7. Type list meas ds1 sum XXXVS to display the bit error count again.
8. Step through Table 31 to troubleshoot.
Table 31: DS1 Bit-error count troubleshooting
Condition Solution
The value of the Bit-error count field is Replace the DS1 circuit pack, and
greater than 1 retest.
The value of the Bit-error count field is 1 The test passed.
9. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to end the test.

Wait about 30 seconds for the DS1 to reframe on the incoming signal and clear DS1 facility
alarms. Use Table 32 to evaluate the test results and to determine the solution.
Table 32: Evaluation of DS1 CPE loopback and service provider test results
Condition Solution
Loopback termination fails The span is still looped somewhere, possibly at the
with an error code of 1313 loopback jack, at the MM710, or somewhere in the
network.
Loopback termination still Replace the DS1 circuit pack, and repeat the test.
fails
The DS1 cannot frame on Either there is something wrong with the receive
the incoming span’s signal signal into the loopback jack from the dumb block
after the loopback jack power or the smart jack, or there is something wrong with
down the MM710 media module itself. To rule out the
MM710 media module, insert a transmit to receive
loop around and verify that the MM710 can frame
to its own signal.
The span failed the service The problem is in the service provider’s network.
provider’s loopback test
The service provider If the MM710 media module successfully passes
successfully loop tested the the CPE Loopback Jack test, then the wiring
span, up to the smart jack between the loopback jack and the smart jack is
suspect. Test and make repairs as needed.
You cannot locate and repair The test will not terminate normally in the absence
the problem in the time of a good framing signal. You have to reset the
available and must terminate circuit pack. Enter reset board XXXVS.
the test
The test terminated normally Proceed with step 10.

10. To restore DS1 administration:

a. At the SAT, type change ds1 XXXVS to open the DS1 administration form.
b. Go to page 2 of the DS1 administration form.
c. Change the value of the TX LBO field to the original value that you wrote down when
you were administering the DS1 for the test.
d. Press ENTER to save the changes.
11. To release the DS1 circuit pack:
a. At the SAT, type release board XXXVS.
b. Leave the loopback jack in place.
Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack

to the network interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX)
1. Have the service provider run a smart-jack loopback test against the network interface
wiring that links the smart jack to the CO (section 3 in Figure 99 through Figure 101).
2. If the tests fails, there is a problem on the network side.
Have the service provider correct it.
Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack
Note:
Note: This test cannot isolate the problem if there are problems in the wiring between
the far-end CO and the far-end MM710. You must coordinate this test with the
DS1 service provider.
Test the short length of customer premises wiring between the loopback jack and the smart jack
(Section 2 in the following 3 figures) using a loopback that overlaps this section of the span.
1. Have the DS1 service provider at the CO end run a local MM710 line loopback test.
2. Have the DS1 service provider at the CO end run a local DS1 payload loopback test.
3. Run a far-end MM710 line loopback, using the following procedure:
a. From the SAT, type test ds1-loop XXXVS far-csu-loopback-test-begin
where XXX is the administered number of the G450 (for example, 002), and VS is the
slot number on the G450 of the media module (for example, V3).
b. Examine the bit-error counts, as in Testing the integrity of data sent over the loop on
page 237.
c. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to terminate the
test.
If the tests fails and there were no problems Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to the
loopback jack or Testing the DS1 span from the smart jack to the network interface termination
or fiber multiplexer (MUX), there is a problem between the loopback jack to the smart jack. Work
with the service provider to isolate the fault.
Figure 99: Network interface at smart jack for an MM710 multi-media module
MDM USB
CONSOLE SERVICES ETR CCA ETH WAN ETH LAN G450
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:
1. Span section 1 6. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft

2. Span section 2 [305 m])
3. Span section 3 7. Loopback jack
4. G450 Media Gateway 8. Network interface smart jack
5. E1/T1 port on an MM710 9. Interface termination or fiber multiplexer (MUX)
multi-media module 10. Central office

Figure 100: Network interface at extended demarcation point (smart jack inaccessible) for
an MM710 multi-media module
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:
1. Span section 1 6. RJ-48 to network interface (up to 1000 ft [305 m])

3. Span section 3 8. Dumb block (extended demarcation)
Figure 101: Network interface at extended demarcation point (smart jack accessible) for
an MM710 multi-media module
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:

2. Span section 2 7. Dumb block (extended demarcation)
12. Dumb block to smart jack RJ-48

Testing a loopback jack without a smart jack

When the loopback jack is added to a span that does not contain a smart jack, the span is
divided into two sections: from the MM710 to the loopback jack and from the loopback jack to
the central office (CO). Section 2 includes the short cable from the loopback jack to the dumb
block demarcation point (part of the loopback jack). This cable is the only part of Section 2 that
is part of customer premises wiring. It is not covered in the loopback jack’s loopback path. See
Figure 102 and Figure 103.
Figure 102: Network interface at “dumb” block for an MM710 multi-media module
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:

3. G450 Media Gateway 7. Dumb block (demarcation point)
Figure 103: Network interface at “dumb” block with repeater line to fiber MUX for an
MM710 multi-media module
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:

3. G450 Media Gateway 7. Dumb block (demarcation point)
4. E1/T1 port on an MM710 8. Repeater
multi-media module 9. Fiber multiplexer (MUX)
10. Central office
You are responsible for finding and correcting problems in the customer wiring (section 1 and
the loopback cable portion of section 2). The DS1 service provider is responsible for finding and
correcting problems in the majority of section 2.
1. Test customer premises wiring from the MM710 to the loopback jack, as described in
Testing the DS1 span from the loopback jack to the smart jack on page 240.
2. Test the loopback jack-to-dumb block and dumb block-to-CO wiring (section 2 in
Figure 102 and Figure 103).
This can be done using a loopback that “overlaps” the section of the span. Any of the
following loopbacks can do this:
● The local MM710’s line loopback, which the DS1 service provider at the CO end
typically activates, tests, and then deactivates.

● The local DS1 interface’s payload loopback, which the DS1 service provider at the CO
end activates and tests.
● The far-end MM710’s line loopback:
a. At the SAT type test ds1-loop location
far-csu-loopback-test-begin to activate this test,
where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback
jack.
b. Type test ds1-loop location end-loopback/span-test to terminate
this test,
where location is the DS1 interface circuit pack corresponding to the loopback
jack.
Bit error counts are examined as described in Testing the DS1 span from the MM710 to
the loopback jack on page 235. This test only isolates problems to Section 2 wiring if there
are no problems in the wiring between the far-end CO and the far-end MM710. Coordinate
this test with the DS1 service provider.
Failure of any of these tests indicate a problem in Section 2. This could mean bad
loopback jack -to-”dumb” block cabling, but is more likely to indicate a problem somewhere
between the “dumb” block and the CO. This is the responsibility of the DS1 service
provider.
If the DS1 Span Test confirms that there are no problems in Section 1, the technician
should proceed as follows to avoid unnecessary dispatch:
a. Identify and contact the DS1 service provider.
b. Inform the DS1 provider that loopback tests of the CPE wiring to the “dumb” block
(section 1) showed no problems.
c. If the far-end MM710 line loopback test failed, inform the DS1 provider.
d. Request that the DS1 provider perform a loopback test of their portion of the Section 2
wiring by sending someone out to loop Section 2 back to the CO at the “dumb” block.
If this test fails, the problem is in the service provider’s wiring.
If the test passes, the problem is in the cable between the loopback jack and the “dumb”
block. Replace the loopback jack.
Configurations using fiber multiplexers

Use the loopback jack when customer premises DS1 wiring connects to an on-site fiber
multiplexer (MUX) and allows wiring to the network interface point on the MUX to be remotely
tested. This requires that the MM710 CSU be set so it can be used on DS1 wiring to the MUX.
Fiber MUXs can take the place of Interface termination feeds as shown in Figure 99 through
Figure 102. Test these spans using the same procedures as metallic spans.
Note:
Note: Fiber MUXs may have loopback capabilities that the service provider can activate
from the CO end. These may loop the signal back to the CO or back to the DS1
MM710. If the MUX provides the equivalent of a line loopback on the “problem”
DS1 facility, activate it after a successful loopback jack test, and use it to isolate
problems to the wiring between the loopback jack and the MUX.
! Important:
Important: Be aware that there are installations that use repeater-augmented metallic lines
between the MUX and the “dumb” block. These lines require DC power for the
repeaters and this DC power is present at the “dumb” block interface to the CPE
equipment. A loopback jack is required in this configuration to properly isolate
and terminate the DC power.
Checking for the presence of DC

1. Make the following four measurements at the network interface jack:
● From transmit tip (T, Pin 5) to receive tip (T1, Pin 2)
● From transmit ring (R, Pin 4) to receive ring (R1, Pin 1)
● From transmit tip (T, Pin 5) to transmit ring (R, Pin 4)
● From receive tip (T1, Pin 2) to receive ring (R1, Pin 1)
All measurements should read 0 (zero) volts DC.

External modems
The following section assumes that you are using one of the recommended external modems.
However, any locally obtained, type-approved external modem should work. Contact your
Avaya representative for more information.
Recommended modems include:
● Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92
This section covers:
● Hardware required when configuring modems on page 248
● Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 on page 248
● Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL on page 249
● Administering Multi-Tech modems on page 249
Hardware required when configuring modems

To configure many modems, you use the Hayes-compatible AT command set.
Note:
Note: If your modem uses a USB connection, use the USB ports instead of the serial
port. Also, AT commands are not required, so you can skip this section. Use the
factory defaults.
Before you can enter AT configuration commands, you must first connect a terminal or a PC
with a keyboard, monitor, and terminal-emulation software to the modem, as follows:
1. Connect one end of an RS-232 cable to an RS-232, serial-communications port (often
called a COM port) on the terminal or PC.
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the modem.
3. If you are using a PC, start your terminal emulation software.
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92
Avaya recommends using a Multi-Tech USB modem, model MT5634ZBA-USB-V92, with an
S8300/700, S85XX, or S87XX configuration. This modem is used for sending alarms, as well as
for remote dial up to the server for maintenance and administration.
External modems
Configuring the MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 modem

In the United States, the Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-US-V92 modem gets configured automatically
through the USB port with the factory defaults. No special configuration is necessary. In a
non-US country, the modem may require settings specific to the country in which the modem
will be used.
Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL
Avaya recommends using a Multi-Tech serial modem, model MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL, with a
G450 media gateway.
The Multi-Tech serial modem connects the G450 media gateway to an external trunk. This
connection enables remote dial in capability for administration and troubleshooting.
Administering Multi-Tech modems

The Multi-Tech modems do not require administration if used in the United States. In non-US
countries, these modems may require administration.
For the full range of modem options, see the Administrator Guide for Avaya Aura
Communication Manager, 03-300509.

Busy tone disconnect equipment for non-U.S. installations

The customer-provided busy tone disconnect adjunct detects busy tone disconnects of
incoming calls on loop-start, 2-wire, analog trunks. In some non-U.S. countries where a G450
Media Gateway is used, the PSTN sends busy tone as the disconnect signal. Therefore, the
S8300 Server, G450 Media Gateway requires a busy tone disconnect adjunct. Figure 104
shows typical connections.
Figure 104: Typical cabling for busy tone disconnect
1
5
2 3 2
4 4 4
cydf057 RPY 123097
Figure notes:
1. Public switched telephone network 4. Tip and ring wires

2. Main distribution frame 5. To loop-start, central-office, trunk
3. Busy tone disconnect device MM711 analog media module
Music-on-hold
Music-on-hold
The music-on-hold (MOH) feature allows a caller to hear music when that caller is placed on
hold. This section covers:
● Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway on page 251
● Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media Gateway on page 254
Music-on-hold can be provided:
● Through a port on an MM711 Analog media module to a customer-supplied music source
on a G450 Media Gateway
● Through a port on an MM711, MM714, or MM714B Analog media module to a
customer-supplied music source on a G450 Media Gateway
On a G450 Media Gateway, the music-on-hold feature is connected through a port on an
MM711, MM714, or MM714B Analog media module .
The G450 Media Gateway does not support an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Therefore, for S8300
Server users, the music-on-hold feature through an auxiliary trunk is not supported. However,
G450 Media Gateway users with an S85X or S87XX Server as primary controller can access
the music-on-hold feature, if their equipment is physically connected to a TN763 auxiliary trunk
circuit pack in an EPN carrier of an S85XX or S87XX system.
Installing a non-FCC-registered music source on a G450

Media Gateway
Figure 105 and Figure 106 show the connections for the music-on-hold feature on a G450
Media Gateway for a non-FCC-registered source.
Note:
Note: The G350 Media Gateway’s physical connection with the MM711, MM714, or
MM714B Analog media modules is the same as the G450 Media Gateway’s
connection with the MM711 Analog media module.
Note:
Note: If you want multiple music sources, you must use multiple ports on the MM711
Analog media module.


using a KS-23395-L3 coupler
Figure 105: Non-FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L3 for

a G450 Media Gateway
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:
1. G450 Media Gateway 4. KS-23395-L3 coupler

2. MM711 Analog media module 5. RCA cord
3. RJ-45 connection 6. Music source
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 media module, or to a port or
trunk port in the MM714 or MM714B media module.
2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a KS-23395-L3 coupler.
3. Connect the KS-23395-L3 coupler to the customer-supplied music source.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to properly connect the music source to the
KS-23395-L3 coupler. Normally, you simply use an RCA cord.
4. Administer the switch for the new equipment.
Music-on-hold

using a KS-23395-L4 coupler
Figure 106: Non-FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L4 for

a G450 Media Gateway
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:
1. G450 Media Gateway 5. 8-pair modular cord

2. MM711 Analog media module 6. 909A/B universal coupler
3. RJ-45 connection 7. 8-pair modular cord
4. KS-23395-L4 coupler 8. Music source
1. Connect one end of an RJ-45 cable to a port in the MM711 Analog media module.
2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a KS-23395-L4 coupler.
3. Connect the KS-23395-L4 coupler to the 909A/B universal coupler using a 8-pair modular
cord.
4. Connect the 909A/B universal coupler to the music source using a 8-pair modular cord.
Note:
Note: For additional installation information, refer to 909A/909B Universal Coupler
Installation Instructions, which is normally shipped with the 909A/909B Universal
Coupler.

Installing an FCC-registered music source on a G450 Media

Gateway
Figure 107 show the connections for the music-on-hold feature on a G450 Media Gateway for
an FCC-registered source.
Note:
Note: If you want multiple music sources, you must use multiple ports on the MM711
Analog media module.
Connecting an FCC-registered music-on-hold source to a G450 using

a KS-23395-L4 coupler
Figure 107: FCC-registered music-on-hold equipment connecting to KS-23395-L4 for a

G450 Media Gateway
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:
1. G450 Media Gateway 4. KS-23395-L4 coupler

2. MM711 Analog media module 5. 8-pair modular cord
3. RJ-45 connection 6. Music source
2. Connect the KS-23395-L4 coupler to the customer-supplied music source.
Normally, you simply use a 8-pair modular cord.
Paging and announcement equipment
Paging and announcement equipment

This section provides information on loudspeaker paging.
On a G450 Media Gateway, the loudspeaker paging feature is connected through a port on an
MM711 Analog media module. The port is administered on the SAT Station screen, not the
Loudspeaker Paging screen.
The G450 Media Gateway does not support an auxiliary trunk circuit pack. Therefore, the
loudspeaker feature through an auxiliary trunk is not supported on a G450 Media Gateway.
Users on a G450 Media Gateway controlled by an S87XX or S85XX can also access the
loudspeaker paging feature if equipment is physically connected to a TN763 auxiliary trunk
circuit pack in an PN carrier of an the S87XX or S85XX system.
Figure 108 shows the connections for loudspeaker paging, dial dictation, or recorded
announcement features on a G450 Media Gateway.
Hooking up loudspeaker paging from a G450 Media Gateway

Figure 108: Typical loudspeaker equipment connections for a G450 Media Gateway
MDM USB
SYSTEM
ALM COMPACT FLASH

CPU
PWR RST ASB
1 2 CARD IN USE 1 2 3 4 5 6
V10
V1 V5
V2 V6
V3 V7
V4 V8
Figure notes:
1. G450 Media Gateway 4. Telephone hybrid (third party)

2. Universal Paging access module device
3. RJ-45 connection 5. Loudspeaker paging system
2. Connect the other end of the RJ-45 cable to a customer-supplied telephone hybrid device.
3. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to properly connect the telephone hybrid device to
your loudspeaker paging system.
4. Administer the M711 port on the SAT Station screen as an analog station.

Note:
Note: Do not administer the MM711 port on the SAT Loudspeaker Paging screen.
Adjunct Information Sources

This section lists documents you can use for installation of some of the key adjunct systems that
you can connect. This section covers:
● Call Management System
● INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems
● Avaya Modular Messaging System
● Avaya Interactive Response
● Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations
● Avaya SIP Enablement Services
● Call Accounting Systems
Call Management System

For information on installing Call Management System R3V12, see the following:
● Avaya Call Management System (CMS) R12 Software Installation, Maintenance, and
Troubleshooting Guide (585-215-117)
● Avaya Call Management System (CMS) Sun Enterprise 3500 Computer Hardware
Installation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting (585-215-873)
● Avaya CMS R12 Sun Blade 100/150 Workstation Hardware Installation, Maintenance, and
Troubleshooting (585-215-783)
● Avaya CMS Sun Fire V880 Computer Hardware Installation, Maintenance, and
Troubleshooting (585-215-116)
Adjunct Information Sources
INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Systems

For information on installing INTUITY AUDIX Messaging systems, see one of the following:
● For INTUITY AUDIX Release 5.1 Messaging, see INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release
5 Installation for New Systems on the INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5
Documentation CD-ROM, 585-313-803.
● For INTUITY AUDIX LX Messaging, see INTUITY AUDIX LX Installation Checklist on the
INTUITY AUDIX LX Release 1 Documentation CD-ROM, 585-313-818.
● Avaya IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging, Release 3.0, Installation, Upgrades, and
Troubleshooting, 11-300532.
● For IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging R1.3 (when available), go to
http://support.avaya.com.
Avaya Modular Messaging System

For information on installing Avaya Modular Messaging systems, see Modular Messaging
Release 2.0 Documentation CD-ROM, 11-300121.
Avaya Interactive Response

For information on installing Avaya Interactive Response systems, see Avaya Interactive
Response R1.3 Installation, Migration, and Troubleshooting Guide (07-300180) on the Avaya
Interactive Response R1.3 Documentation CD (07-300181).
Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Stations

For information on installing Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station systems,
see the Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station (OPS) Installation and
Administration Guide, 210-100-500.
Avaya SIP Enablement Services

For information on installing Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES), see the SIP Enablement
Services Implementation Guide, 16-300140, and SIP Support in Avaya Aura Communication
Manager 4.0, 555-245-206.

Call Accounting Systems

For information on installing Call Accounting Systems, see the online help or documentation
included with the eCAS software CD-ROM.
Appendix F: Information Checklists
This appendix can be used as an aid for collecting necessary information for the installation of
an Avaya G450 Media Gateway Media Gateway.
The following lists are provided:
● Installer's Checklist: Tools, software, laptop settings, customer network information
● Serial Number and Login Information: Serial number of the G450 and login/passwords for
various access methods
● Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP): IP addresses and setup
commands for the MGP
● Installation Site Information: Customer and site contact information

Information Checklists
Installer's Checklist
Tools
laptop with 32 MB RAM
40 MB available disk space
RS-232 port connector or Ethernet interface
cross-over Ethernet cables
direct Ethernet cable
USB flash drive (optional)
screwdriver
Software
Windows 95/98/ME/XP/NT/2000/Vista operating system
FTP server program. TFTP server program and SCP server program are recommended
Telnet program
terminal emulation program: HyperTerminal or other
TCP/IP networking software: bundled with Windows OS
web browser: Netscape 4.7x or Internet Explorer 5.0
Ethernet connections
laptop default address and mask: 192.11.13.5, 255.255.255.252
browser: no proxies
communications properties: 9600 baud rate; no parity; 8 data bits, 1 stop bit; no flow
SSO login
Obtaining this login will require that you complete the authentication process. You will not
be able to obtain the license file or to perform remote feature activation without the SSO
login authentication process. You will not be able to obtain the license file or to perform
remote feature activation without the SSO login.
Dial plan
IP addressing plan
List of customer-provided IP services
Serial Number and Login Information
Serial Number and Login Information
G450 Serial Number
Logins
Name & Password

S8300 Server
G450 Media Gateway
SSO Authentication Login
ftp anonymous
email address
Communication Manager

Quick Setup for G450 Media Gateway Processor (MGP)
Task CLI Command Requested Fields Information to enter
Define a Primary Enter the context of the vlan id

Management interface which you want to
Interface (PMI) set as the Primary
Management Interface
(PMI). For example:
interface vlan
In the context of the IP address
interface, assign an IP
address and subnet mask netmask
to the interface:
ip address
In the context of the
interface, define this
interface as the PMI
pmi
Configure the Create a vlan and enter its vlan id
ICC-VLAN configuration context:
Note: By default, the interface vlan
ICC-VLAN is 1.
Therefore configure In the context of the vlan
the ICC-VLAN only if interface, set the current
you wish to configure vlan as the icc-vlan:
it for a VLAN other icc-vlan
than 1.
Set the VLAN ID of a LAN vlan id
port (10/5 or 10/6) to the
VLAN number of the module number
ICC-VLAN:
set port vlan port number
Define the CLI prompt hostname hostname
Define a default ip default-gateway gateway IP address
gateway
Create a list of valid set mgc list IP address1

Media Gateway
Controller(s) IP address2
IP address3
IP address4
Display device show system
information
Installation Site Information
Installation Site Information
Site Name Main Phone
Installation Address
Shipping Address
Customer Contact Name

Title
Phone:
FAX:
Mobile:
Pager:
email:
Off-hours contact:
Salesperson/ Account Exec Sales/AE phone:

Other Contact Info:
Notes to installer: access procedures, safety/security procedures
Access Contact Name

Title
Phone:
FAX:
Mobile:
Pager:
email:
Off-hours contact:
Installer Name
Date of Installation

Appendix G: Equipment List
The following lists contain information necessary for ordering Avaya G450 Media Gateway and
Avaya S8300 Server equipment.
Note:
Note: If ordering parts, use the 9-digit "Comcode" numbers, not the 6-digit numbers.
Table 33: Equipment List: Avaya G450 Media Gateway
Avaya G450 Media Gateway
The Avaya G450 Media Gateway is a 19-inch 3u rack-mountable device. The G450 Media
Gateway contains VoIP resources, a layer 2 switch, modular interface connectivity for
traditional trunk and station access, and performs the function of a gateway/gatekeeper. It
also houses eight Media Module Bays. The Avaya G450 Media Gateway is designed to
offer options and scalability. You can mix and match Media Modules, as well as add
additional Avaya G450 Media Gateways as they grow in size.
Avaya G450 Media Gateway Comcodes (for Services Ordering Only)
Comcode Number of Items Description
700407802 1 G450 chassis/Main board/

80 channel DSP daughterboard/
1 PSU
700432487 1 G450 chassis/Main board/
1 PSU
700017932 1 Rack Mount screw set for
attaching the ears to the rack
700438997 2 Rack Mount Ears
700439003 1 Cable Management Ear
700305535 15 Rack Mount screw set for
attaching the ears to the chassis
700318421 4 Feet
700318397 1 Tech Laptop Cable
700336597 8 Media Module Blanks
1 of 2

Equipment List
Table 33: Equipment List: Avaya G450 Media Gateway (continued)
Avaya G450 Media Gateway
700336621 2 Low-Profile blanks (S8300)

700439011 1 G450 PSU Blank Panel
700236680 1 Grounding Kit for multiple G450s
in a 19 inch rack
700439029 1 Cable grounding terminal-ring to
open end 10AWG, 8M
Avaya G450 Media Gateway Comcodes for Customer and Services ordering
Comcode Description
700407802 G450 chassis/Main board/

1 PSU
700432487 G450 chassis/Main board/
1 PSU
700432495 G450 main board
700432503 80 channels DSP daughterboard
700432511 20 channels DSP daughterboard
700432529 G450 Power Supply Unit 400W
AC
700432537 G450 Chassis
700438278 G450 Fan tray
700394992 808A Emergency Transfer Panel
700457013 Upgrade memory kit
2 of 2
Equipment List
Table 34: Equipment List: G450 Media Gateway Power Cords
G450 Media Gateway Power Cords
Supplies Power to the G450 Media Gateway. One cord per gateway is required, and
there are various cords depending on the power required for the country in which the
unit will be installed.
When you order this material code, a descriptive attribute will be required; the attributes
are:
Attribute Option Comcode: Description
CRD 30 405362641: PWR CORD

9X10IN USA 17505
CRD 31 407786623: PWR CORD 98IN
EUROPE 12013S
CRD 32 407786599: PWR CORD 98IN
UNITED KINGDOM 14012
CRD 33 407786631: PWR CORD 98IN
AUSTRALIA 15012
CRD 34 407790591: PWR CORD INDIA
P250CIM
CRD 42 408161453: PWR CORD 96IN
ARGENTINA

Equipment List
Table 35: Equipment List: Avaya S8300B Server
Server
S8300B Server
The Avaya S8300B Server is an Intel™-based server complex that carries:
● administration and maintenance provisioning software
● Hard drive (Field-replaceable. Comcode: 700307028)
● 512 MB RAM
● Web serve
● Linux OS
● H.248 Media Gateway Signaling Protocol
● CCMS messages tunneled over H.248 Signaling Protocol
● TFTP server
The S8300B Server can act as the primary server of the G450 Media Gateway,
or it can serve as a local survivable processor for remote/branch customer
locations.
Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700335144
Equipment List
Table 36: Equipment List: Avaya S8300C Server
Server
S8300C Server
The Avaya S8300C Server is an Intel™-based server complex that carries:
● Administration and maintenance provisioning software
● Hard drive (Field-replaceable. Comcode: 700307028)
● One GB RAM
● Web serve
● Linux OS
● H.248 Media Gateway Signaling Protocol
● CCMS messages tunneled over H.248 Signaling Protocol
● TFTP server
The S8300D Server can act as the primary server of the G450 Media Gateway,
or it can serve as a local survivable processor for remote/branch customer
locations.
Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700407810

Equipment List
Table 37: Equipment List: Media Modules
Media Modules
MM710 T1/E1 Media Comcodes (for Services Ordering Only):

Module 700394737, 700439250, 700466634
The MM710 T1/E1 media module offers the combined features of a DEFINITY
DS1 circuit pack and includes the following:
● A built-in CSU
● AMI-BASIC
● Both A-law for E1 and µ -law for T1
● Line Coding: AMI, ZCS, B8ZS for T1 and HDB3 or AMI for E1
● Stratum 3 Clock compatibility
● Trunk signaling for supporting US and International CO trunks and tie
trunks as currently in existence
The MM710 T1/E1 media module supports the universal DS1 conforming to
1.544 Mbps T1 standard and 2.048 Mbps E1 standard
ISDN PRI is also supported for T1 or E1 revenue-associated option. The MM710
is RoHS compliant.
DEF DS1 LOOPBACK JACK 700A

Provides the ability to remotely troubleshoot the MM 710 T1/E1 media module. It
is required for any customer with a maintenance contract and highly
recommended for any other customer.
Material Code: Apparatus Code: None Required for any
700406101 customer with a
maintenance contract
and an MM710 T1/E1
media module. Highly
recommended for other
customers to avoid
expensive technician
visits.
1 of 5
Equipment List
Table 37: Equipment List: Media Modules (continued)
Media Modules
MM711 Analog Media Comcodes (for Services Ordering Only):

Module 700394661, 700466626
The MM711 Analog media module supports eight analog interfaces allowing the
connectivity of Loop Start, Ground Start, Analog DID trunks, and 2-wire analog
Outgoing CAMA E911 trunks. The MM711 Analog media module also allows
connectivity of analog, tip/ring devices such as single line telephones, modems
or group 3 fax machines. Each port may be configured as either a trunk interface
or a station interface.
Also included is support for caller ID signaling, ring voltage generation for a
variety of international frequencies and cadences, and administrable line
termination styles. The MM711 is RoHS compliant.
MM714 Analog Media Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700395221

Module
The MM714 Analog media module supports four analog stations and four CO
trunks. Analog DID trunk connections are to be associated with the ports labeled
"Line" and not "Trunk". The MM714 is RoHS compliant.
MM714B Analog Media Comcodes (for Services Ordering Only):

Module 700453889, 700466618
The MM714B Analog media module supports four analog stations and four CO
trunks, as well as an Emergency Transfer Relay between a line port and a trunk
port. Analog DID trunk connections are to be associated with the ports labeled
"Line" and not "Trunk". The MM714B is RoHS compliant.
MM712 DCP Media Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394745

Module
The MM712 DCP media module allows connectivity of up to eight 2-wire DCP
voice terminals. MM712 does not support 4-wire DCP telephones.
Signal timing specifications for the MM712 support TDM Bus Timing in receive
and transmit modes. The G450 Media Gateway supplies only +5 VDC and –48
VDC to the MM712 media module. Any other required voltages must be derived
on the module.
Loop range secondary protection is provided on the MM712. The MM712 is also
self-protecting from an over current condition on a tip and ring interface. The
MM712 is RoHS compliant.
2 of 5

Equipment List
Media Modules
MM716 24 port Analog Comcodes (for Services Ordering Only):

Media Module 700394703, 700466642
The MM716 provides 24 analog ports supporting telephones, modem, and fax.
These ports can also be configured as DID trunks with either wink-start or
immediate-start. The 24 ports are provided via a 25-pair RJ21X amphenol
connector, which can be connected by an amphenol cable to a breakout box or
punch down block. The MM716 is RoHS compliant.
MM717 24 port DCP Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394711

Media Module
The MM717 DCP Medial Module supports 24 DCP stations. The MM717 uses a
25-pair amphenol connector on the media module’s faceplate. The 24 DCP ports
are intended for in-building use only. Phone lines connected to those ports are
not to be routed out-of-building. Failure to comply with this restriction could
cause harm to personnel or equipment. The MM717 is RoHS compliant.
MM720 BRI Media Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700394752

Module
3 of 5
Equipment List
Media Modules
The MM720 BRI media module contains eight ports that can be administered
either as BRI trunk connections or BRI endpoint (telephone and data module)
connections. Information is communicated in two ways:
● Over two 64 Kbps channels called B1 and B2 that can be circuit-switched
simultaneously
● Over a 16 Kbps channel called the D channel that is used for signaling. The
D channel occupies one time slot for all eight D channels
The circuit switched connections have a u-law or A-law option for voice
operation. The circuit switched connections operate as 64 Kbps clear channels
when in the data mode.
The MM720 BRI media module does not support combining both B channels
together to form a 128 Kbps channel.
Note:
Note: The MM720 BRI media module cannot be administered to
support both BRI trunks and BRI endpoints at the same time.
For BRI trunking, the MM720 BRI media module supports up to eight BRI
interfaces, or up to 16 trunk ports, to the central office at the ISDN S/T
reference point.
For BRI endpoints, each of the eight ports on the MM720 BRI media module
can support one integrated voice/data endpoint or up to two BRI stations and/or
data modules. Supported endpoints must conform to AT&T BRI, World Class
BRI, or National ISDN NI1/NI2 BRI standards. The MM720 BRI media module
provides -40 volt phantom power to the BRI endpoints.
The MM720 is RoHS compliant.
MM722 2-port BRI Media Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700395239
Module
The MM722 BRI media module supports two BRI ports. The MM722 is RoHS
compliant.
MM340 Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700397128

The MM340 Media Module supports one E1/T1 WAN port for connecting to a
WAN endpoint device. The MM340 is RoHS compliant.
4 of 5

Equipment List
Media Modules
MM342 Media Module Comcode (for Services Ordering Only): 700397136

The MM342 Media Module supports one USP WAN port for connecting to a
WAN endpoint device. The MM342 is RoHS compliant.
5 of 5
x
Index
Index
ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Announcements, gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Numerical Approved grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
400B2 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 ART (Automatic Registration Tool), running for RAS IP
808A Emergency Transfer Panel, installing . . . . . 60 address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ASB button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ASG authentication
A enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67, 200
Access, RFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 installing authentication file
Accessing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . . . . 155 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Asynchronous TCP/IP links . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Accessories box, contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Attaching
Adjunct amphenol cable to MM716 or MM717 . . . . . . . 55
IOLAN+, connecting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 analog telephone to analog port . . . . . . . . . 50
power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 and enabling a modem
sources of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Avaya Interactive Response systems . . . . . 257 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Avaya Modular Messaging systems . . . . . . 257 and enabling a USB modem
Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES) . . . . 257 gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Call Accounting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . 59
Call Management System . . . . . . . . . . 256 BRI stations to ISDN port . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
EC500 Extension to Cellular systems . . . . . 257 chassis to wall or rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Intuity AUDIX Messaging systems . . . . . . 257 circuit protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Off-PBX Station systems . . . . . . . . . . . 257 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Administrator logins Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) . . . . . . . . 58
adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 data and voice devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 DCP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
After installation E1/T1
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
testing WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
LSP failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 external router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 ground conductors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 IP telephone to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Alarm ISDN trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 modem to gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . 63
OSS, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SNMP, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 switch or network data port . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Allocating media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . 35 USB modem to gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . 73
Alternate Software Bank button . . . . . . . . . . . 136 USP WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Amphenol cable, attaching to MM716 or MM717 . . . 55 WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Analog Attendant console
port, connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . 50 auxiliary power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
telephone, connecting to analog port . . . . . . . 50 distance limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
trunk AUDIX
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Index
coresidency, shared resources of .

. . . . . . 207 INADS, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
installations . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 208 installation
location . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 208 log file, saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
S8300 upgrades . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 208 IP phone upgrade files, uploading . . . . . . . 173
software . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 208 laptop, configuring to access . . . . . . . . . . 155
LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Media Gateway Controller (MGC)
Authentication configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
CHAP, enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 and upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
file upgrading existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
for CM modem
installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 status, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
for gateway name and number list, importing . . . . . . . . 177
installing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Network Time Protocol (NTP), configuring . . . 164
installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 optional services, configuring . . . . . . . . . . 162
Automatic Registration Tool OSS alarm, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
see ART overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Auxiliary power for attendant console . . . . . . . . 205 phone message files, installing . . . . . . . . . 160
Avaya Aura Communication Manager (CM) primary controller IP addresses, configuring . . . 161
software Primary Management Interface (PMI), configuring 167
upgrading root password, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 S8300 Server IP addresses, configuring . . . . 161
via S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Server IP addresses, configuring . . . . . . . . 161
with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 SNMP
without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . 104 alarm, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
version requirements for LSP . . . . . . . . . . 23 V1 community strings, configuring . . . . . . 169
Avaya EC500 Extension to Cellular systems, sources of V3 user, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 system data, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Avaya Gateway Manager, upgrading Java applet via FTP/ telephony
TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 parameters, configuring. . . . . . . . . . . 175
Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) translation defaults, configuring . . . . . . . 176
accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 translation information, generating . . . . . . . 165
accessing, configuring laptop for . . . . . . . . . 155 trunk
administrator logins adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 list of, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
alarms, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 media module, configuring . . . . . . . . . 184
authentication file, installing . . . . . . . . . . . 172 modifying
call routing, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 IP route configuration . . . . . . . . . . 181
CM parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
authentication file, installing . . . . . . . . . 187 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
license file, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 status, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
software UPS, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 usage options, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
configuration, initial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Avaya Interactive Response systems, information on 257
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Avaya Modular Messaging systems, information on . 257
Domain Name Server (DNS), configuring . . . . . 163 Avaya Navy Shipboard Services . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet, importing . . 157 Avaya Off-PBX Station systems, information on
endpoints, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
extension ranges, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . . 59
firmware Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES), sources of
upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
gateway Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . . . . . . 105
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
firmware, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
x
Index
see Gateway chassis installation

Checking
B available number of power outlets . . . . . . . . 26
Backing up the gateway to USB mass storage device 125 environment before installing . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Before installation for DC in loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
environmental verification . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
grounding verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 integrity of local equipment on DS1 span . . . . 235
power verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Circuit protection, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
read planning documentation . . . . . . . . . . 21 Clearance, front and rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CLI
site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 commands for upgrading firmware
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 via a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Boot banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Box inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Brackets, mounting troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
for rack upgrading gateway firmware
attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
checks before . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 via USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 CM
with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 authentication file
without cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
for wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
attaching to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 license file
BRI stations, connecting to ISDN port . . . . . . . . 49 downloading to laptop . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Busy tone disconnect equipment . . . . . . . . . . 250 installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Buttons software
ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 upgrading
RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
via S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . 103
C without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . 104
Cable guides on mounting bracket . . . . . . . . 29, 30 Combination limitations for media modules . . . . . . 35
Call Accounting Systems, sources of information . . . 258 Command Line Interface
Call center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 see CLI
gateway announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Commands
Call Detail Recording (CDR) copy ftp EW_archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
data collection, administering . . . . . . . . . . 228 copy ftp module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
equipment, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 copy ftp phone-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
parameters, administering . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 copy ftp phone-script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
switch-to-adjunct link, testing . . . . . . . . . . 230 copy ftp SW_imageA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Call Management System, sources of information . . 256 copy ftp SW_imageB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Call routing, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 copy running-config startup-config . . . . . . . . 118
CBC (Coupled Bonding Conductor) . . . . . . . . . 58 copy scp phone-script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 copy tftp EW_archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CCA port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 copy tftp module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CDR copy tftp phone-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
see Call Detail Recording (CDR) copy tftp phone-script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
CD-ROM drive, upgrading software . . . . . . . 74, 103 copy tftp SW_imageA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CHAP authentication copy tftp SW_imageB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67 copy usb EW_archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
enabling in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 copy usb module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Chassis copy usb phone-image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 copy usb phone-script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
front panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 copy usb SW_imageA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
installation copy usb SW_imageB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Index
erase phone-image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 66

ip tftp-server file-system size . . . . . . . . . . 118 Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . . 59
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 BRI stations to ISDN port . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
save translation lsp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Call Detail Recording (CDR) equipment . . . . . 228
show application-memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 circuit protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
show controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
show interfaces serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 computer to Services port . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Compact flash Coupled Bonding Conductor (CBC) . . . . . . . . 58
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 data and voice devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Computer DCP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
connecting to the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 E1/T1 trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . . . 114 E1/T1 WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
HyperTerminal, setting up on . . . . . . . . . . 219 endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
laptop, configuring for IW access . . . . . . . . 155 Ethernet WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 external router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Conditions good for installation . . . . . . . . . . . 26 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuration IOLAN+ 104 to adjunct and LAN . . . . . . . . 217
Avaya Aura Communication Manager software via S8300 IP telephone to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ISDN trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
DS1 loopback jack modem after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . . 201
checking for DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 music source
using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . 246 registered
files to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . . 254
upgrading IP phone, overview . . . . . . . . 115 unregistered
gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 to gateway via KS-23395-L3 . . . . . . . 252
basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . . 253
initial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 over-voltage protection devices. . . . . . . . . . 56
initial in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 power to the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
LAN printer to gateway via TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . 232
device on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
software, recording information for . . . . . . 82 serial modem in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
laptop, for accessing IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Services port to computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
limitations of media modules. . . . . . . . . . . 35 sneak-current protection devices . . . . . . . . . 56
modem switch or network data port . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Multi-Tech trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
hardware required for . . . . . . . . . . . 248 USB modem
MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . . 249 gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NTP in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
remote, via Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 USP WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
telephone software, recording information for . . . 83 Connections
trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 adjunct power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
trunk software, recording information for . . . . . 85 end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
WAN IOLAN+ 104 terminal server cabling . . . . . . 217
line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Connectivity
software, recording information for . . . . . . 86 IOLAN+ 104, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Connecting LAN device, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
analog telephone to analog port . . . . . . . . . 50 testing after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Console (CON) port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
and enabling a modem Contact closure
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 63 implementing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 port description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
USB Contents of gateway package . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 73
x
Index
copy ftp EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . . 108 configuration files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

copy ftp module CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . 108 latest version of guide from website. . . . . . . . 15
copy ftp phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . . 118 recent firmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
copy ftp phone-script CLI command . . . . . . . . . 118 upgrade software from CD-ROM . . . . . . . 74, 103
copy ftp SW_imageA CLI command . . . . . . . . . 108 DS1
copy ftp SW_imageB CLI command . . . . . . . . . 108 loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
copy running-config startup-config CLI command . . 118 administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
copy scp phone-script CLI command . . . . . . . . 118 checking local equipment integrity . . . . . . 235
copy tftp EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . 109 configuration
copy tftp module CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . 109 checking for DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
copy tftp phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . . 118 using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . 246
copy tftp phone-script CLI command . . . . . . . . 118 installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
copy tftp SW_imageA CLI command . . . . . . . . 109 selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
copy tftp SW_imageB CLI command . . . . . . . . 109 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
copy usb EW_archive CLI command . . . . . . . . 114 without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
copy usb module CLI command. . . . . . . . . . . 114 testing
copy usb phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . . 118 data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
copy usb phone-script CLI command . . . . . . . . 118 from ISCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
copy usb SW_imageA CLI command . . . . . . . . 114 from smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
copy usb SW_imageB CLI command . . . . . . . . 114 to smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Coupled Bonding Conductor with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
see CBC without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Coupler span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
KS-23395-L3 checking integrity of local equipment on . . . 235
connecting T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
unregistered music source to gateway . . . 252 DTE
KS-23395-L4 V.35 serial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
connecting X.21 serial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
registered music source to gateway via . . 254
unregistered music source to gateway via . 253
CWY1 board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 E
E1 trunk, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
E1/T1
D port, on MM340 media module . . . . . . . . . . 58
DCP WAN link, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
media modules, ports for in-building use only . . . 57 ECC
telephone, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 see External Communications Controller
Device Manager, upgrading Java applet via a USB device Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW)
114 importing in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Devices importing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
connecting endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
data and voice, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Emergency Transfer
new, replacing and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . 81 see ETR
Dimensions of plywood board for mounting gateway . 21 Enabling
DNS, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 ASG authentication in GIW . . . . . . . . 65, 67, 200
Documentation, planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CHAP authentication . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67, 200
Domain Name Server modem
see DNS gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Downloading general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CM serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
authentication file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 USB
license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
gateway gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 66
firmware to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Endpoint devices
firmware to local TFTP sever . . . . . . . . . 111 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
IP telephone

Index
new, replacing and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . 81 fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Endpoints gateway main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Environmental conditions MP20 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
mounting solution for harsh . . . . . . . . . . . 29 MP80 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
verifying for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
EPW VoIP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
see Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) Firmware
Equipment banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
busy tone disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 copying files to S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . 113
Call Detail Recording (CDR), connecting . . . . . 228 default bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 downloading recent updates . . . . . . . . . . . 25
loudspeaker files
hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . 255 upgrading IP phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
required for installation installing from TFTP server on the S8300 Server . 112
gathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . 216 upgrading
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 example using FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . 109
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 gateway
erase phone-image CLI command . . . . . . . . . 119 CLI commands for, via FTP/TFTP . . . . 108
ETH LAN port downloading to local PC . . . . . . . . . . 114
connecting downloading to local TFTP server . . . . . 111
external router to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 from primary controller . . . . . . . . . 106
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
for network switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ETH WAN port overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
connecting using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . 108
Ethernet WAN link to. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 using CLI via USB device . . . . . . . . . 113
external router to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Ethernet installation worksheets, preparing . . . . . . 109
WAN link, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Server Values worksheets, preparing . . . . . 110
ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 with Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . 105
ETR port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Front panel
Extension ranges, adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . 177 gateway
External buttons
Communications Controller (ECC) . . . . . . . . 251 ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
endpoint devices, connecting . . . . . . . . . . 47 RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Multi-Tech modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
hardware to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ports
MT5634ZBA-USB-V92, configuring . . . . . . 249 CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL. . . . . . . . . . 249 Compact flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
router, connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . 58 Console (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ETH WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
F router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fan tray, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fastening chassis to wall or rack . . . . . . . . . . 29 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Feet, affixing to stand gateway on table . . . . . . . 33 system LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fiber multiplexers media modules
configuring DS1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 MM340
Field replaceable units LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
adding and removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
x
Index
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 components, initializing in GIW . . . . . . . . . 190

MM342 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 initial gateway in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . 189
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 initial in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
MM710 connecting
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 computer to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 power to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 printers via TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
MM711 firmware
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 downloading files
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
MM712 to local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 installing from TFTP server on S8300 Server. . 112
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 upgrading
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 CLI commands for, via FTP/TFTP . . . . 108
MM714 CLI commands for, via USB device . . . . . 114
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 from primary controller . . . . . . . . . 106
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
MM714B overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . 108
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 using CLI via USB device . . . . . . . . . 113
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 with Avaya Software Update Manager . . 105
MM716 front panel
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 buttons
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MM717 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ports
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MM720 Compact flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Console (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ETH WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
MM722 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 system LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
S8300 Server ground block for multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 installation
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 chassis
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 media modules, before inserting . . . . 34, 35
mounting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
G rack mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
G450 1.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 tabletop installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
G450 2.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33
Gateway equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
backing up to USB mass storage device . . . . . 125 non-S8300, prerequisites for . . . . . . . . . 22
call center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 S8300 Server, prerequisites for . . . . . . . . 22
announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 session, initializing in GIW . . . . . . . . . 190
channels, number of supported . . . . . . . . . 88 IOLAN+ 104 terminal server, administering . . . 223

Index
LAN gateway
device components, initializing . . . . . . . . . . . 190
adding to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 firmware, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 installation session, initializing . . . . . . . . 190
modules, adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 IP phone upgrade files, uploading . . . . . . . 197
loudspeaker paging, hooking up from . . . . . . 255 Media Gateway Controller (MGC), configuring . . 194
main board modem
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 connecting after running GIW . . . . . . . . 201
on-board modules serial
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 testing after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . 201
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 USB
mounting hardware required . . . . . . . . . . . 21 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
music source enabling (gateway with S8300). . . . . . . 73
registered enabling (gateway without S8300) . . . . . 66
connecting to via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . 254 Primary Management Interface (PMI), configuring 191
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 RAS IP address, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
unregistered running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
connecting to via KS-23395-L3 . . . . . . 252 SNMP
connecting to via KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . 253 V1 community strings, configuring . . . . . . 192
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 V3 user, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
package, contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Gigabit Ethernet port, for network switching . . . . . 47
prerequisites for installing S8300 Server in . . . . 22 Ground block for multiple gateways . . . . . . . . . 41
replicating to USB mass storage device . . . . . 125 Ground conductors, attaching
restoring from USB mass storage device . . . . . 125 general requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
specifications, technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 safety ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Grounding
supported modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 approved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
telephone requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Supplementary Ground Conductor . . . . . . . . 41
configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 verifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Guide
trunk downloading latest version from website . . . . . 15
adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 related resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
USB mass storage device security alert labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
backing up to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 sending comments about . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
replicating to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
restoring from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
voice modules, adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Guides for cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30
WAN
line, configuring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
modules, adding to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 H
Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) Hardware versions
ASG authentication, enabling . . . . . . 65, 67, 200 G450 1.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
authentication file, installing . . . . . . . . . . . 196 G450 2.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
basic configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Help
CHAP authentication, enabling . . . . . . . . . 200 resources for technical assistance . . . . . . . . 18
configuration, initial gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 189 technical assistance
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 international . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Electronic PreInstallation Worksheet, importing . . 190 within the US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
firmware, upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Hot-inserting WAN and LAN modules . . . . . . . . 81
x
Index
Hot-swapping media modules . . . . . . . . . . . 81 LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

HyperTerminal, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 messaging system, sources of informations . . . 257
trunk group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Inventory of packed items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
I IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ICC administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
see Internal Communications Controller first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
ICC- VLAN gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
configuring using CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ICSU cabling connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
see Integrated Channel Service Unit connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Import name and number list in IW . . . . . . . . . 177 to adjunct and LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
INADS connectivity, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 distance from switch to LAN hub . . . . . . . . 217
configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 HyperTerminal, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Inserting installation and administration . . . . . . . . . 216
media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 navigating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
S8300 Server module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Installation troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
808A Emergency Transfer Panel . . . . . . . . 60 IP address
after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 RAS, obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
AUDIX IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 IP services, administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Avaya Partner Contact Closure Adjunct . . . . . 59 IP telephones
before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 not supported by local TFTP server . . . . . . . . 116
conditions good for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 supported by local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . 115
contact closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 TFTP server upgrade example . . . . . . . . . . 119
DS1 loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 upgrade files
selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 uploading in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 uploading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
equipment, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
firmware from TFTP server on the S8300 Server . 112 configuration files, overview . . . . . . . . . . 115
IOLAN+ 104 terminal server, equipment required . 216 considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
log file examples of
saving in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 4602 after file stored in NVRAM . . . . . 121
music source 4602SW and 4602D . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
registered firmware files, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
unregistered on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 251 ip tftp-server file-system size CLI command . . . . . 118
required equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ISDN
testing BRI stations, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 trunk, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
LSP failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 K
worksheets, preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 KS-23395-L3 coupler
Installing the gateway chassis connecting unregistered music source to gateway 252
see Gateway chassis installation KS-23395-L4 coupler
Integrated Channel Service Unit (ICSU) . . . . 233, 251 connecting
testing DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 registered music source to gateway via . . . 254
Internal Communications Controller (ICC) . . . . . . 251 unregistered music source to gateway via . . 253
Intuity AUDIX
hunt group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Index
selecting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
L without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Labels testing
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
security alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
LAN from smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
devices to smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
adding and connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 with smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 without smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Loudspeaker paging equipment
IOLAN+, connecting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 255
port LSP
connecting IP phone to . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Avaya Aura Communication Manager version
connecting switch to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
software configuration, recording information for . 82 failover testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
switch, connecting to the gateway . . . . . . . . 47 license file requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Laptop, configuring for IW access . . . . . . . . . . 155
LEDs
media modules M
MM340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Main board, gateway
MM342 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
MM710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 on-board modules
MM711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MM712 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MM714 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MM714B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
MM716 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Maintenance web pages, accessing . . . . . . . . . 69
MM717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Media Gateway Controller (MGC)
MM720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 configuring
MM722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 and upgrading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
power supply indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
S8300 Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 existing, upgrading in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
License file Media Gateway installation
for CM before inserting media modules . . . . . . . . . 35
installing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 connecting
obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
required for LSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 power to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Lightning exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ground conductors
Limitations attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
attendant console distance . . . . . . . . . . . 206 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IOLAN+ 104, distance from switch to LAN hub . . 217 installing
media module combinations . . . . . . . . . . . 35 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
LINE port, connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . 50 media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Logins, administrator power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
adding in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 power supply unit, removing . . . . . . . . . . .28
configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Restricted Access Location . . . . . . . . . . .41
Loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 S8300 server module, inserting. . . . . . . . . .37
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 safety ground, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . .43
checking local equipment integrity . . . . . . . . 235 Media module slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
configuration Media modules
checking for DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 before installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
using fiber multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . 246 capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 combination limitations of . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
x
Index
firmware media module

upgrading via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . 108 circuit protection devices for outdoor endpoints . 56
upgrading via USB device . . . . . . . . . . 114 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
for indoor use only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
gateway chassis, inserting into . . . . . . . . . 39 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
hot-swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 MM712
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 DCP ports
LAN modules, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 connecting DCP phones to . . . . . . . . . . 52
MM340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 for in-building use only . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
MM342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 media module
MM710. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
MM711. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MM712. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
MM714. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 MM714
MM714B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 analog trunk ports, connecting analog trunks to . . 53
MM716. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 LINE port, connecting analog telephone to . . . . 50
MM717. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 media module
MM720. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MM722. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
new, replacing and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 MM714B
slot allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 media module
slots, permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
voice modules, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
WAN modules, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Memory modules MM716
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 analog port
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . . 50
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . . . . . 53
Messaging attaching amphenol cable to . . . . . . . . . . . 55
IA770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 media module
LX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 connecting to punch down block for RJ-45 or RJ-11
MGC jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
see Media Gateway Controller (MGC) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
MM340 media module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
connecting to WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 MM717
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 attaching amphenol cable to . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 DCP ports
MM342 media module connecting DCP phones to . . . . . . . . . . 52
connecting to WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 for in-building use only . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 media module
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 connecting to punch down block for RJ-45 or RJ-11
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
MM710 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
E1/T1 port, connecting E1/T1 trunk to . . . . . . 54 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
media module ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
circuit protection devices for outdoor endpoints 56 MM720
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ISDN ports, connecting ISDN BRI trunks to . . . . 54
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 media module
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 connecting ISDN BRI stations to . . . . . . . 49
MM711 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
analog port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
connecting analog telephone to . . . . . . . . 50 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . . . . . 53 MM722
ISDN ports, connecting ISDN BRI trunks to . . . . 54

Index
media module types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 without cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 MP20 modules
Modem adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 channels, number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
connecting removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 MP80 modules
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 63 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 channels, number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
serial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
USB replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Multiplexers, fiber
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 66 configuring DS1 loopback
USB in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
dial backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Multi-Tech modem
enabling administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 MT5634ZBA-USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 63 MT5634ZBA-USB-V92. . . . . . . . . . . 248, 249
serial in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL . . . . . . . . . . 249
USB in GIW Music source
gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 73 registered
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 66 connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . . . 254
Multi-Tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 installing
administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
hardware to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 unregistered
MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 connecting to gateway via
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 KS-23395-L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
MT5634ZBA-V92-GLOBAL. . . . . . . . . . 249 KS-23395-L4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
permanent connection for reporting alarms . . . . 63 installing on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
settings, Configure Server Maintenance Web page 72 Music-on-hold (MOH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
status, displaying in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 source
supported by gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 registered
testing connection connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . 254
after running GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 installing on gateway . . . . . . . . . . 254
gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 unregistered
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 68 connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L3 . 252
USB connecting to gateway via KS-23395-L4 . 253
supported by gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 installing on gateway . . . . . . . . . . 251
supported by S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Mutual inductance coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Mounting
brackets
for wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 N
attaching to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Name and number list, importing in IW . . . . . . . 177
gateway Network
in 19-inch rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 data port, connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . 47
in rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
on tabletop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 LAN device, testing within and without . . . . . . 82
on wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33 Network Time Protocol (NTP), configuring in IW . . 164
hardware required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 NVRAM
options for chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 initializing with a jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
mounting brackets for rack
attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
checks before . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
x
Index
MM711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
MM712 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
O MM714 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Optional MM714B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
services, configuring in IW. . . . . . . . . . . . 162 MM716 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Ordering MM717 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 MM720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 MM722 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
WAN line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
OSS alarm, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Outdoor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Out-of-building installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Over-voltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
switch or network data, connecting . . . . . . . . 47
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
P Positioning
Package inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 gateway in rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Paging equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 S8300 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
loudspeaker Power
hooking up from gateway . . . . . . . . . . 255 attendant console
Password auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
RAS, obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 connection
root adjunct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
changing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 end-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
PC to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
connecting to the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 cords
downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . . . 114 obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Phone message files, installing in IW . . . . . . . . 160 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Physical description of gateway front panel . . . . . 133 local and phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Planning outlets, checking available number of . . . . . . . 26
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Power supply
Platform, hardware, for harsh environment . . . . . 29 unit
Plugging in installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 LED indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Plywood board replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Pre-installation activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
using to wall-mount gateway. . . . . . . . . . . 33 Preinstallation worksheet
Ports see Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW)
CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Preparation
CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 installation worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
connecting Server Values worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
data and voice devices to . . . . . . . . . . 47 telephone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
endpoint devices to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 trunk configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
contact closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 WAN line configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ETH LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Primary controller
ETH WAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 configuring IP addresses in IW . . . . . . . . . 161
ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 upgrading gateway firmware from . . . . . . . 106
IOLAN+ 104 terminal server Primary Management Interface (PMI)
administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 configuring in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
connectivity testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
MM340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 configuring using CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
MM342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 management functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
MM710. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Printers

Index
connecting to gateway via TCP/IP . . . . . . . . 232

S
R S8300
Rack mounting Server
brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Avaya Aura Communication Manager software,
upgrading via . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
the gateway chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
call center solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
RAS
connecting to USB modem . . . . . . . . . . 73
IP address
copying firmware to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
entering in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 67
gateway chassis, inserting into . . . . . . . . 37
obtaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
installing firmware from the TFTP server on . . 112
password, obtaining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IP addresses, configuring in IW . . . . . . . 161
RDTT
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
see Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT)
ports
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT)
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
prerequisites for installing in gateway . . . . . 22
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
software
package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
upgrading using IW or the Upgrade tool . . . 104
Remote
upgrades for IA770 Intuity AUDIX . . . . . . . 208
access, enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Safety
configuration via Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ground, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Removing installation equipment . . . . . . . . . . 79
labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacing
save translation lsp CLI command . . . . . . . . . . 78
endpoint devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Screws required for mounting gateway . . . . . . . . 21
fan tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Securing amphenol cable to MM716 or MM717 . . . . 55
main board on-board module, gateway . . . . . . 87
Security alert labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
main board, gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Serial
memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
cable
power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DTE V.35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
VoIP modules, MP20 and MP80 . . . . . . . . . 88
DTE X.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Replicating the gateway to USB mass storage device 125
modem
Required
connecting and enabling . . . . . . . . . . . 63
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
connecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
for installing IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . 216
Serial number of gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
hardware for Multi-Tech modem . . . . . . . . . 248
viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Server
reset CLI command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
see S8300 Server
Restoring the gateway from USB mass storage device125
Server IP addresses, configuring in IW . . . . . . . 161
Restricted Access Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Server Values worksheets, preparing . . . . . . . . 110
RFA access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Services
RJ-45 splitter for connecting two BRI stations . . . . 49
optional, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Root password
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
changing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
connecting a computer to . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Router
show application-memory CLI command . . . . . . . 118
connecting external to gateway . . . . . . . . . 58
show controllers CLI command . . . . . . . . . . 129
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
show interfaces serial CLI command . . . . . . . . 129
RST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Single Sign-On (SSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Rubber feet, affixing to stand gateway on table . . . 33
Site
Ruggedized mounting solution for harsh environment 29
conditions, checking before installation . . . . . . 26
Running
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) . . . . . . . . . . 156
Smart jack
Running Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . 189
installing DS1 loopback jack with . . . . . . . . 234
testing DS1 loopback jack with . . . . . . . . . 235
x
Index
Sneak-current protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

SNMP within the US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
alarm, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
V1 community strings, configuring in GIW . . . . 192 chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
V1 community strings, configuring in IW . . . . . 169 clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
V3 user, configuring in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . 193 power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
V3 user, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Telephone
Software adding to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
recording LAN information for . . . . . . . . 82 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
recording telephone information for . . . . . . 83 IP, connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
recording trunk information for . . . . . . . . 85 software configuration, recording information for . . 83
recording WAN information for . . . . . . . . 86 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reliable Data Transport Tool (RDTT) after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 troubleshooting
downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 several . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Telephony
package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 parameters, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . 175
upgrading translation defaults, configuring in IW . . . . . . 176
Avaya CM via S8300 Server . . . . . . . . . 103 Telnet, remote configuration via . . . . . . . . . . 104
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Terminal server
with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 administering
without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 IP services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
version, viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 IOLAN+ 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Software Update Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 administering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Specifications, technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 cabling connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Supplementary Ground Conductor . . . . . . . . . 41 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
if ground block is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 to adjunct and LAN . . . . . . . . . . . 217
if ground block not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 connectivity, testing . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Survivability by modem dial backup . . . . . . . . . 63 distance from switch to LAN hub . . . . . . 217
Switch HyperTerminal, setting up. . . . . . . . . . 219
connecting to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 installation and administration . . . . . . . . 216
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 rebooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Switch-to-adjunct link, testing troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
System data, viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Terminating telephones on the MM717 and MM716 . . 55
Testing
computer type data device . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
T DS1
T1 loopback jack with smart jack . . . . . . . . 235
DS1 span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 loopback jack without smart jack . . . . . . 244
trunk, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 span
Tabletop installation of the gateway chassis . . . . . 33 from ISCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
TCP/IP from smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 to smart jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
printers installation
connecting to gateway via . . . . . . . . . . 232 connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
settings for Maintenance web pages . . . . . . . 69 LSP failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Technical assistance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
international . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Index
trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

integrity of data sent over loop . . . . . . . . . . 237 ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
IOLAN+ 104 connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 removing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
LAN device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 software configuration, recording information for . . 85
modem connection status, displaying in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 68 after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
server type data device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
switch type data device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 TRUNK port, connecting analog trunk to . . . . . . . 53
switch-to-adjunct link
CDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 U
trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Uninterruptable Power Supply
WAN link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 see UPS
TFTP server Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
downloading gateway firmware to local . . . . . . 111 Upgrading
for upgrading IP phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Avaya Aura Communication Manager software
installing firmware from, on the S8300 Server . . . 112 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
IP telephones overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
not supported by local . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 firmware
supported by local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 example
upgrade example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 using a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
setting up using FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
uploading IP phone upgrade files in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 installation worksheets, preparing . . . . . . 109
in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Server Values worksheets, preparing . . . . . 110
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 gateway firmware
Translations, generating information in IW . . . . . . 165 CLI commands for, via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . 108
Troubleshooting downloading
CLI not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 to local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
gateway has no power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 to local TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
IOLAN+ 104 terminal server . . . . . . . . . . . 226 from primary controller . . . . . . . . . . . 106
IP telephone upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
telephone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
one stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 using CLI
several stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 via USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
trunk stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 using CLI via FTP/TFTP . . . . . . . . . . 108
WAN line stops working . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 with Avaya Software Update Manager . . . . 105
Trunk IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
adding configuration files
in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
to gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
analog considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
connecting to TRUNK port . . . . . . . . . . 53 examples of
ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 4602 after file stored in NVRAM . . . . . 121
configuring 4602SW and 4602D . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 firmware files, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 media modules and devices . . . . . . . . . . . 81
list of, viewing in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 software
media module, configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . 184 S8300, using IW or the Upgrade tool . . . . 104
modifying in IW with CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
IP route configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 without CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . 104
x
Index
UPS testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
configuring in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 modules
models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 hot-inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 software configuration, recording information for . . 86
Usage options troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
selecting in IW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Worksheets
USB installation, preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
mass storage device Server Values, preparing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
backing up the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CLI commands for upgrading firmware . . . . 114
example of upgrading firmware . . . . . . . . 114
replicating the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . 125
restoring the gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
upgrading gateway firmware using CLI . . . . 113
modem
connecting in GIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 73
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 66
enabling in GIW
gateway with S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . 73
gateway without S8300 . . . . . . . . . . 66
supported by gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
USB Modem
supported by gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
supported by S8300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
USP port, on MM342 media module . . . . . . . . . 57
V
Verifying
environmental conditions before installation . . . 26
grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
VoIP modules
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
W
Wall mounting
brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
the gateway chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33
WAN
configuring on gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
E1/T1 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
link
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
connecting to E1/T1 port . . . . . . . . . . . 58
connecting to USP port . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
preparing for configuration . . . . . . . . . . 86

Index

Avaya Installing and Configuring G450 Media Gateway

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Avaya Installing and Configuring G450 Media Gateway

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Avaya Installing and Configuring G450 Media Gateway

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installing and Upgrading the Avaya

G450 Media Gateway

About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 1: Before you install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 2: Installing the Avaya G450 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . 29

Issue 4 May 2009 3

Brackets with cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Chapter 3: Connecting devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Connecting an analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chapter 4: Connecting and enabling a modem for remote access . . . 63

Chapter 5: Configuring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 6: After installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Issue 4 May 2009 5

Chapter 7: Adding media modules and devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Chapter 8: Upgrading and replacing Field Replaceable Units . . . . . . 87

6 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Installing the upgrade memory kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 9: Upgrading the Avaya Aura

Chapter 10: Upgrading the G450 firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 11: Upgrading IP phone configuration and firmware files . . . 115

Issue 4 May 2009 7

TFTP IP telephone upgrade examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Chapter 12: Backing up and restoring the G450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Chapter 13: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Appendix A: Front panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

8 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

The front panel of the Avaya MM342 media module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Appendix B: Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Appendix C: Running the Avaya Installation Wizard (Avaya IW) . . . . . 155

Issue 4 May 2009 9

Preliminary screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Appendix D: Running the Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) . . . . . . 189

Appendix E: Power supplies and adjunct systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

10 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX installations and S8300

Issue 4 May 2009 11

Administering a loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

12 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Appendix F: Information Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Appendix G: Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Issue 4 May 2009 13

14 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Downloading this book and updates from the Web

Downloading this book

Safety labels and security alert labels

Issue 4 May 2009 15

16 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03-602058

Issue 4 May 2009 17

18 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Issue 4 May 2009 19

20 Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway

Before going to site

Preparing required equipment

Equipment required for installation

Equipment required for mounting

Issue 4 May 2009 21

Equipment required for installing an S8300 Server